Download TELECOMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY

"Technical Information"
HIGHER EDUCATION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY
(3HE)
* Center:
"................................................................"
* Country: "................................................................"
* Date:
* Issue:
"................................................................"
"................................................................"
Quality Certificates:
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management
(for Design, Manufacturing,
Commercialization and After-sales service)
European Union Certificate
(total safety)
Certificates ISO 14000 and
ECO-Management and Audit Scheme
(environmental management)
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
(Worlddidac Member)
Higher Education Telecommunications Laboratory
(3HE)
Index
- Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out (Example).
- List of modules and teaching units included plus summarised catalogues
(included in priority 1 + 2 + 3).
Ref.:3HE-pre(01/11)
Classroom and Laboratory Lay Out
HIGHER EDUCATION
TELECOMMUNICATIONS LABORATORY
(Example of Priority 1)
(3HE)
32 cm
Unit
1,4 cm
TECNEL
INT
Unit
ROOM 3
1,6 cm
1,5 cm
Web-cam
Computer for each Teaching Unit
Teacher and Student Desk with
computers
Table for Teaching Unit
SERIN/CACC
INT
Unit
OTHER PRIORITIES
LIEBA
Unit
LICOMBA
Unit
OTHER TEACHING
AND
NON TEACHING UNITS
25 cm
Unit
Teaching Unit
INT
Electronic
Interface
90x40
Cupboard
150x80 cm
48x35 cm
EDIBON ESN SCADA-NET
90x60 cm
80x30
Table office
Shelves
Table
E: 1:100
9 cm
Unit
Unit
EGPS
90x60
90x60
EMI
TEACHER
DESK
STOCK
Unit
ESA
EDIBON
ESN
SCADA-NET
EBL
Unit
Unit
90x60
PROJECTOR
ETM
150x80
150x80
150x80
90x40
90x40
90x40
ROOM 2
MAIN
ELECTRICAL
CABINET
90x60
EMERGENCY DOOR
ROOM 1
MAIN
WATER
CABINET
90x60
2,7 cm
90x40
150x80
06x051
MAIN
AIR
PANEL
90x60
90x40
TOILET
100x40
ELECTRONIC
BLACKBOARD
SERVICES
MANAGER
ROOM
90x60
TOILET
Unit
EAN
90x40
150x80
ERA
OTHER PRIORITIES
Unit
Unit
EXPANSIONS SPACE
SEMINARY
MPSSC
CODITEL
LOCAL NET
WITH SCADA-NET
SYSTEM
STUDENT
TOILET
STAND ALONG
AND
DANGEROUS
UNITS
OTHER TEACHING
AND
NON TEACHING UNITS
90x40
3,3 cm
Higher Education Telecommunications Laboratory
(3HE)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 1
0200. Electronics
0213-210/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
0213-211/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
0213-212/10S: Elementary Electronics (10 CAI + CAL)
0260: Industrial Electronics Module
0300. Communications
0321-310/10S: Analog Communications (10 CAI + CAL)
0321-320/10S: Digital Communications (10 CAI + CAL)
0321/5B: Analog and Digital Communications (5EBC-100)
0330: Telephony Module
0340: Applied Communications Module
0300/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Electronics & Communications
0500. Energy
0510: Energy: Modular Power System Simulator Basic Module
0511: Energy: Modular Power Simulator "ESN"
Ref.:3HE-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-210/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIEBA
BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M1
D. C. CIRCUITS MODULE
1
3
M1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C
CIRCUITS
10
4
M1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR D.C.
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
5
M2
A. C. CIRCUITS MODULE
1
6
M2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF A.C.
CIRCUITS
10
7
M2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A.C.
CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
8
M16
ELECTRICS NETWORKS MODULE
1
9
M16/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ELECTRIC NETWORKS
10
10
M16/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ELECTRICS NETWORKS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
11
M17
ELECTROMAGNETISM MODULE
1
12
M17/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ELECTROMAGNETISM
10
13
M17/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ELECTROMAGNETISM (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
14
M3
SEMICONDUCTORS I MODULE
1
15
M3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SEMICONDUCTORS I
10
16
M3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SEMICONDUCTORS I (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
17
M5
POWER SUPPLIES MODULE
1
18
M5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
POWER SUPPLIES
10
19
M5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER
SUPPLIES (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
21
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
22
EDAS/VIS-0.25
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
1
VIS
DAIB
DAB
1
1
1
Ref: 0213-210/10S
ITEM
2 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
22
EDAS/SOF
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
23
0210PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
24
0210PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
25
0210IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
26
0210CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
27
0210TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
28
0210MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-211/10S
ITEM
1 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIEBA
BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M4
SEMICONDUCTORS II
1
3
M4/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SEMICONDUCTORS II
10
4
M4/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SEMICONDUCTORS II (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
5
M6
OSCILATORS MODULE
1
6
M6/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
OSCILLATORS
10
7
M6/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
OSCILLATORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
8
M7
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS I MODULE
1
9
M7/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
10
10
M7/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
11
M8
FILTERS MODULE
1
12
M8/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
FILTERS
10
13
M8/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
FILTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
14
M9
POWER ELECTRONICS MODULE
1
15
M9/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
POWER ELCTRONICS
10
16
M9/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR POWER
ELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
17
M10
DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS MODULE
1
18
M10/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DIGITAL SYSTEMS AND CONVERTERS
10
19
M10/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DIGITAL SYSTEMS & CONVERTERS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
20
M11
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS MODULE
1
21
M11/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS
10
22
M11/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS FUNDAMENTALS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
23
M12
BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS MODULE
1
MODULE
Ref: 0213-211/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
2 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
24
M12/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS
10
25
M12/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC
COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
26
M13
BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS MODULE
1
27
M13/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BASIC SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS
10
28
M13/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR BASIC
SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
29
M14
OPTOELECTRONICS MODULE
1
30
M14/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
OPTOELECTRONICS
10
31
M14/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
OPTOELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
32
M18
THREE-PHASE CIRCUITS MODULE
1
33
M18/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
THREE-PHASE
10
34
M18/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THREEPHASE CIRCUITS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
35
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
36
EDAS/VIS-0.25
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
VIS
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
37
EFAC
FUB
EFAC/CIB
DAB
EFAC/CCSOF
FCE
FCM
38
0211PARTS
THREE DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D),
FORMED BY:
BASE STRUCTURE AND ROBOT FOR THREE
DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR THREE DIMENSIONS
PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR THREE DIMENSIONS
PHYSICS SYSTEM
SET FOR ELECTRICAL FIELDS (3D) APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SET FOR MAGNETIC FIELDS (3D APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 0213-211/10S
ITEM
3 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
39
0211PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
40
0211IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
41
0211CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
42
0211MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
43
0211TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
ELEMENTARY ELECTRONICS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0213-212/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIEBA
BASIC ELECTRONICS AND ELECTRICITY
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M41
RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER MODULE
1
3
M41/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
RESISTANCE TRANSDUCER
10
4
M41/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
RESISTANCE TRANSDUCERS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
5
M43
APPLICATIONS OF TEMPERATURE MODULE
1
6
M43/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
APPLICATIONS OF TEMPERATURE
10
7
M43/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
APPLICATIONS OF TEMPERATURE (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
8
M44
APPLICATIONS OF LIGHT MODULE
1
9
M44/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
APPLICATIONS OF LIGHT
10
10
M44/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
APPLICATIONS OF LIGHT (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
11
M45
LINEAR POSITION AND FORCE MODULE
1
12
M45/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
LINEAR POSITION AND FORCED
10
13
M45/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR LINEAR
POSITION AND FORCE (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
14
M46
ENVIROMENTAL MEASUREMENTS MODULE
1
15
M46/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ENVIROMENTAL MEASUREMENTS
10
16
M46/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ENVIRONMENTAL MEASUREMENTS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
17
M47
ROTATIONAL SPEED&POSITON CONTROL MODULE
1
18
M47/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ROTARIONAL SPEED & POSITION CONTROL
10
19
M47/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ROTATIONAL SPEED & POSITION CONTROL
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
20
M48
SOUND MEASUREMENTS MODULE
1
21
M48/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SOUND MEASUREMENTS
10
22
M48/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SOUNDS
MEASUREMENTS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
23
M49
APPLICATION OF TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE
1
Ref: 0213-212/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
2 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
24
M49/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF D.C
CIRCUITS FOR APPLICATION TO TEMPERATURE AND
PRESSURE
10
25
M49/CAL
APPLICATIONSOF TEMPERATURE AND PRESION
10
26
M60
ANALOG/DIGITAL CONVERTERS MODULE
1
27
M60/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ANALOG/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
10
28
M60/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ANALOG/DIGITAL CONVERTERS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
29
M61
DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTERS MODULE
1
30
M61/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTERS
10
31
M61/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
DIGITAL/ANALOG CONVERTERS (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
32
M65
CONTROL AND REGULATION MODULE
1
33
M65/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CONTROL AND REGULATION
10
34
M65/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CONTROL AND REGULATION (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
10
35
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
36
EDAS/VIS-0.25
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
37
0212PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
38
0212PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
39
0212IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
40
0212CAPRO
41
0212TD
42
0212MANU
VIS
1
1
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
1
Ref: 0213-212/10S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
issue:01/11
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS MODULE
Ref: 0260
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TECNEL
TECNEL.Unit
DAB
TECNEL/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF POWER
ELECTRONICS, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
(CONVERTERS: DC/AC+AC/DC+DC/DC+AC/AC).
FORMED BY:
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF POWER
ELECTRONICS INCLUDING CONTROL INTERFACE
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF POWER ELECTRONICS (CONVERTERS:
DC/AC+AC/DC+DC/DC+AC/AC)
QTY.
1
1
1
1
2
TECNEL/T
TACHODYNAMO 60 V,1000 R.P.M
1
3
RCL3R
RESISTIVE,INDUCTIVE AND CAPACITIVE LOADS
MODULE
1
4
EMT15 (1)
D.C. PERMANENT MAGNETS MOTOR
1
5
EMT17 (1)
THREE-PHASE MOTOR OF SQUIRREL CAGE WITH "Y"
CONNECTION
1
6
TECNEL/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR STUDY
OF POWER ELECTRONICS (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
7
PECADS
POWER ELECTRONICS COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND
SIMULATION SOFTWARE OF THE FOLLOWING TYPES
OF CONVERTERS: DC/AC, AC/DC, DC/DC, AC/AC
1
8
SERIN/CACC
COMPUTER CONTROLLED INDUSTRIAL SERVOSYSTEMS
TRAINER(FOR AC AND DC MOTORS
INDUSTRIAL SERVOSYSTEMS TRAINER(FOR AC AND
DC MOTORS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR INDUSTRIAL
SERVOSYSTEMS TRAINER, (FOR AC AND DC MOTORS)
1
SERIN/CACC/BOX
DAB
SERIN/CACC/CCSOF
9
1
1
1
SERIN/CACC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
NDUSTRIAL SERVOSYSTEMS TRAINER(FOR AC AND
DC MOTORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
10
0260PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
11
0260PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
12
0260IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
13
0260CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
14
0260TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
15
0260MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0260
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.6- Industrial Electronics
Electronics
2.- Electronics
TECNEL. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Power Electronics. (Converters: DC/AC+AC/DC+DC/DC+AC/AC)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
1
Unit: TECNEL. Teaching Unit for the Study of Power
Electronics, including Control Interface.
2
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
(Converters: DC/AC+ AC/DC+DC/DC+AC/AC).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
TECNEL Unit:
Unit with Computer Control and Data Acquisition System designed to study the basis of Power
Electronics. It allows students to study AC/DC, DC/AC, DC/DC, AC/AC converters.
Steel box. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Front panel: Diodes module: 6 diodes. Thyristors module: 6 thyristors. IGBTS Module: 6 IGBTS.
Snubber net. Sensors module: 4 voltage sensors, 2 current sensors. Power supply
connections for Vr, Vs, Vt, Neutral and Ground. Practices schemes.
Back panel: Data Acquisition Board Connector (SCSI connector). Tachodynamo connector. Main fuses
(Vr, Vs, Vt) and LEDs. Circuit breaker (main switch).
Single-phase driver. Three-phase driver. IGBT driver. TSI board. PIC board. SKHI61 board. Four relays
board. 2 Three-phase relays. Commuted power supply. Three-phase magnetothermal.
Control interface.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 TECNEL/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible,
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously
on all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the
process and modification of the conditions during the process.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 40 Kg.
1
1.- Single phase half-wave
rectifier with load R.
2.- Single phase half-wave
rectifier with load R-L.
3.- Single-phase half-wave
rectifier with R-L load with
free wheeling diode
(FWD).
4.- Single-phase full-wave
rectifier.
5.- Three-phase half-wave
uncontrolled rectifier.
6.- Three-phase full-wave
uncontrolled rectifier.
7.- Single-phase half-wave
controlled rectifier.
8.- Single-phase full-wave
controlled rectifier.
9.- Single-phase full-wave
controlled rectifier with a
DC motor.
10.- Three-phase full-wave
completely controlled.
11.- S i n g l e - p h a s e s e m i
controlled rectifier.
12.- Three-phase full-wave
semi-controlled rectifier.
13.- Chopper.
14.- Single-phase square-wave
inverter.
15.- Single-phase displaced
phase inverter.
16.- Single-phase inverter.
PWM control.
17.- Three -phase inverter.
PWM control with R load
and R-L load.
18.- Three -phase inverter.
PWM control with AC
motor.
19.- Alternating regulators: R
and R-L load.
20.- Asynchronous three-motor
with rotor in short circuit
(squirrel cage).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/
TECNEL.pdf
TECNEL/B. Computer Controlled Basic Teaching Unit for the Study of Power Electronics. (Converters: AC/DC+AC/AC)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
1
Unit: TECNEL/B. Basic Teaching Unit for the Study of Power
Electronics, including Control Interface.
(Converters: AC/DC+AC/AC).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
TECNEL/B Unit:
Unit with Computer Control and Data Acquisition System designed to study the basis of Power Electrics. It allows students to
study AC/DC, AC/AC converters.
Steel box. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Front panel: Diodes module: 6 diodes. Thyristors module: 6 thyristors. Snubber net. Sensors module: 4 voltage sensors, 2
current sensors. Power supply connections for Vr, Vs, Vt, Neutral and Ground. Practices schemes.
Back panel: Data Acquisition Board connector (SCSI connector). Tachodynamo connector. Main fuses (Vr, Vs, Vt) and LEDs.
Circuit breaker (main switch).
Single-phase driver. Three-phase driver. TSI board. Four relays board. 2 Three-phase relays. Commuted power supply. Threephase magnetothermal. Control Interface.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250
KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 TECNEL/B/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and multicontrol
software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process parameters. Management,
processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the
obtained data, after to the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 35 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/TECNEL-B.pdf
Page 26
1.- Single phase half-wave rectifier with
load R.
2.- Single phase half-wave rectifier with
load R-L.
3.- Single-phase half-wave rectifier
with R-L load with free wheeling
diode (FWD).
4.- Single-phase full-wave rectifier.
5.- T h r e e - p h a s e h a l f - w a v e
uncontrolled rectifier.
6.- Three-phase full-wave uncontrolled
rectifier.
7.- Single-phase half-wave controlled
rectifier.
8.- Single-phase full-wave controlled
rectifier.
9.- Single-phase full-wave controlled
rectifier with a DC motor.
10.- Three-phase full-wave completely
controlled.
11.- Single -phase semi- controlled
rectifier.
12.- Three -phase full-wave semicontrolled rectifier.
13.- Alternating regulators: R and R-L
load.
2.6-Basic
Industrial
Electronics
2.1Electronics
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
SERIN/CA. Computer Controlled Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for AC motors)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
2
Control Interface Box
Motor
3 Cables and Accessories
Unit: SERIN/CA. Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for AC motors)
1
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Manuals
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
SERIN/CA Unit:
The SERIN/CA trainer consists on an Control Interface Box connected to a three-phase motor and to a PC. The control
interface has a resolver for three-phase motors that controls the speed, position and current of the
motor. The RS232 communication between the control interface and the PC provides the SERIN/CA the possibility of
commanding the motor from the PC and visualize the most important signals of the motor. Velocity, Position and Torque
Control. It allows predefined moves and programming.
Control Interface Box:
Front panel:
3 Digital outputs: They have a green LED that indicates if the output is active or not. Emulative encoder outputs: two pair
of outputs (CH A Out, CH B Out and their respective denied outputs) that are TTL signals of incremental position
generated by the resolver feedback, and one pair of outputs (CH S Out and their denied) that TTL works as marker of
pulses. Analog output 4 (relay). Analog outputs of the DAC monitor: these analog outputs are monitored points of
general character. 6 digital inputs for those signals that are introduced to enable the different available functions in the
software. 6 buttons to enable the digital inputs. 6 switches, with the same function as the buttons, but with the only
difference that they are switches. Switch outfitter of digital inputs: there is a switch that enables the digital inputs. Analog
input: this input allows an analog use directly of the user. It is an A/D input. Voltage supply: 3 sources of D.C. in the unit
(+24 V. , +12V., and -12V. DC.) 2 Potentiometers. Ignition switch.
Back panel:
Voltage supply (220 V A.C.). Three-phase output when solving: it is a three-phase output that feeds when you are solving
and, therefore, allows their movement. Connection port in series: to connect the unit with the PC by the port in series.
Connection with the feedback: it is a connection with the motor feedback. It allows the encoder to manage the motor.
Motor: AC motor, 0.7kW, 2.8A ac, 4200 rpm, 320V dc. Sensor RESOLVER :1 Speed, 1X/RX, 3 phase.
2 SERIN/CA/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of signals in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and multicontrol software.
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process
and modification of the conditions during the process.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. Motor:410 x 170 x 150 mm. Weight: 5 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1
1.-Homing.
2.-Clutch/Control.
3.-Turn movement (w/correction
phase).
4.-Registration movements.
5.-Dry movements.
6.-Stop and blockade. Transitory
states.
7.-Stop and blockade. Influence on
the filtered velocity.
8.-Transitory velocity study.
9.-Feedback gain manage.
10.- M o d i f i c a t i o n
of
Fe e d b a c k
Parameters and Phases U, V and W.
11.-Use and modification of the
feedback filters.
12.-Phase voltages U, V and W showing.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/SERIN-CA.pdf
SERIN/CC. Computer Controlled Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for DC motors)
Always included
in the supply:
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface Box
Direct Current
Motor and Encoder
Module
1
Teaching
Technique
used
2 Software for:
3 Cables and Accessories
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Manuals
Unit: SERIN/CC. Industrial Servosystems Trainer (for DC motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
SERIN/CC Unit:
It is formed by a Control Interface Box and a Direct Current Motor and Encoder Module. The Control Interface Box has a 4quadrants servo amplifier for DC motors that controls the motor speed, position and current of the motor. In order to do
this control the feedback is done thanks to an encoder. The RS232 communication between the Control Interface Box and
the computer (PC) provides the possibility of commanding the motor from the PC and to visualize the most important signals
of the motor. The 4-quadrant servo amplifier controls the motor operation and the braking operation in both rotation
directions clockwise and counterclockwise. Velocity, Position and Torque Control.
It allows predefined moves and programming. Control Interface Box:
Front panel:Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
7 Digital outputs: They have led’s that indicate if the outputs are active or not. 13 Digital inputs: 7 user definable digital
inputs for process control,1 digital input (trigger signal), 3 digital inputs: reference, left limit and right limit, 2 digital
inputs power stage and stop. 2 Analog inputs with voltages in the range of 0-5V. 2 Potentiometers to select the value of
the analog inputs (0-5 V DC). Ignition Switch.
Back panel:
Voltage supply that feeds the unit with 220 V of alternating current. Motor power supply: it is a 24 V DC motor power
supply. Connection plug to connect the Control Interface with the PC by the RS-232 port, in order to allow the software
to manage the motor. Connection with the motor Feedback, it allows the encoder to manage the motor.
Direct Current Motor and Encoder Module:
DC Motor, 90W, position, speed and current are controlled by the Control Interface. Digital encoder, 500 pulses per
revolution, with RS232 communication port.
2 Power supply wires. 2 Communication RS232 wires.
2 SERIN/CC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of signals in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible, open and multicontrol
software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to
the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 40 Kg. Motor+Esconder Module:300x300x120 mm. Weight: 5Kg.
1
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Autotuning.
2.- Manual tuning of the position
regulator.
3.- Motion commands in MPBUS RS232
mode.
4.- Signals Graph, Transient Analysis.
5.- Batch Commands.
6.- User´s parameters, Position Val.,
velocity Val., Acceleration Val.
7.- Digital inputs and outputs in I/O
mode.
8.- Load and braking simulation.
9.- Searching reference.
10.- Input/Output functions.
11.- State commands and Exception.
12.- Velocity, Position and Torque control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/industrial/SERIN-CC.pdf
Page 27
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0321-310/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LICOMBA
COMMUNICATIONS INTEGRATED LABORATORY,
FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
ED-CAM
AM COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
1
3
ED-CAM/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF AM
COMMUNICATIONS
10
4
ED-CAM/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR AM
COMMUNICATIONS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
5
ED-CFM
FM COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
1
6
ED-CFM/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF FM
COMMUNICATIONS
10
7
ED-CFM/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FM
COMMUNICATIONS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
8
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
9
EDAS/VIS-1.25
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (1.250.000 samples
per second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
10
0310PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
11
0310PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
12
0310IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
13
0310CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
14
0310TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
15
0310MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
VIS
1
Ref: 0321-310/10S
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
3
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
3.- Communications
2
Modules
1
(power supply needed)
Available analog
communications modules:
Power Supply
2
Modules
(power supply needed)
Available digital
communications modules:
FA-CO
(EDICOM1)
(ED-CAM)
or
EBC-100
(EDICOM2)
(ED-CFM)
3
CAI.Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
INS/SOF.
Instructor Software
(EDICOM3)
+
Student/Module Software
4
LICOMBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
(EDICOM4)
Teaching
Technique
used
(EDICOM5)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Teaching
Technique
used
DAIB.
Data acquisition interface box
(EDICOM6)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
The Complete Laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply
+ Module/s is the minimum supply).
Available Modules
Analog Communications
- ED-CAM. AM Communications.
- ED-CFM. FM Communications.
Digital Communications
-
EDICOM 1. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction.
EDICOM 2. Time Division Multiplex (TDM). PAM Transmitter and Receiver.
EDICOM 3. MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception.
EDICOM 4. Delta Modulation and Demodulation.
EDICOM 5. Line codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation.
EDICOM 6. Optical Fibre Transmission and Reception.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 30
3.1-Basic
Analog
Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
2.1Electronics
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
(continuation)
(continuation)
1
Power Supply
FA-CO. Power Supply
EBC-100. Base Unit (optional)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector.
This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from ED-CAM, ED-CFM and EDICOM type.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight:2Kg approx.
2
Modules
They consist on electronic boards which permit the student to do the exercises/practices corresponding to the target subject. On these modules the circuits to be designed are
serigraphed. Real components are displayed to familiarize the student with them. There are many points where measures can be taken (voltage, current intensity, resistance,
etc.). Moreover, circuit and electronic component faults can be simulated too. Every Module has its own manual, that gives the theoretical knowledge and explains everything
the student needs to carry out the exercise /practice. We provide eight manuals per module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included.
Power supply needeed.
Dimensions (approx.) of each module= 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Analog Communications
ED-CAM. AM Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The module consist of two different boards:
One is the transmitter, the other one the receiver.
Communication between them may be through connecting cables or
by antennas.
Modulation study:
D.S.B.: Double Sideband.
S.S.B.: Single Sideband.
DSB-SC: Double Sideband with Suppressed Carrier.
Also contains an audio amplifier and a loudspeaker. Adjustable audio
volume through the amplifier.
Output signal selector through loudspeaker or headphones.
Sixteen error commuter switches (eight per board).
Telescopic antenna.
Numbered testing points for measurements using an oscilloscope.
Transmitter specifications:
DSB output frequency: 1 Mhz. SSB output frequency:1.4 MHz.
DSB MODULATOR, consisting of: a crystal oscillator (1
MHz.); a balanced modulator and a band-pass filter N.1; and
a ceramic pass-band filter.
SSB MODULATOR, consisting of: an oscillator of 455
kHz.; a balanced modulator; a ceramic pass-band filter; and
a balanced modulator and pass-band filter N.2
Receiver specifications:
Type: Superheterodyne.
Two Detectors:
Detector diode for demodulation of AM-DSB.
Product detector for demodulation of AM-SSB.
Frequency range: 525 Hz. to 1605 KHz.
Intermediate frequency: 455 KHz.
Blocks: Local oscillator; BFO; Product detector;
Radio-frequencyamplifier; mixer; two intermediate frequency amplifiers; AGC (automatic gain control); and an
audio amplifier.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of the main features of the transmitter and the
receiver.
2.- Analysis of modulation:
D.S.B.: Double Sideband.
S.S.B.: Single Sideband.
3.- Signal modulation using AM-DSB :
Carrier modulation.
Amplitude modulation.
Frequency modulation.
Analysis of DSB modulation.
Diode detector operation.
Superheterodyne receiver operation.
AM-DSB signal reception and demodulation.
Generation of DSB modulated signals.
4.- Signal modulation using AM- SSB :
Analysis of SSB modulation.
Analysis of the AM-SSB demodulator.
Analysis of BFO (heterodyne oscillator).
AM-SSB signal reception and demodulation.
5.- Analysis of the Image Frequency.
6.- Adjustment of Tuning Circuits.
7.- Error Generator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
ED-CFM. FM Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The module consists of a single board for studying FM
communications, including transmission and reception, and also noise
effects existing in communication.
The board includes two frequency modulators and five discriminator
circuits.
Alternatively it is possible to modulate the amplitude of the FM signal
using an external noise input signal.
Transmitter:
Modulator circuits: Reactor and Varactor.
Output frequency: 455 KHz.
Frequency range of the audio oscillator: 300 Hz. to 3.4 KHz.
Receiver:
Demodulator circuits: Tuner resonator, square-law
detector, ratio discriminator, synchronous detector, and a
Foster-Seeley discriminator.
Low-pass filter/Amplifiers.
Filter cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz.
Eight commuter switches.
Testing points for measurements using an oscilloscope.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Introduction:
Main features of the FM transmitter-receiver board.
2.- FM Modulation:
Analysis of the reactor modulator.
Analysis of the varactor modulator.
3.- Frequency Demodulation Techniques:
Analysis of the Untuned Resonant Circuit.
Analysis of the Quadratic Detector.
Analysis of the Foster-Seeley Detector.
Analysis of the Ratio Detector.
Analysis of the Closed-Loop Phase Detector Circuit.
4.- Adjustment of Tuning Circuits.
5.- Error Generator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 31
www.edibon.com
3.- Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from ED-CAM, ED-CFM and EDICOM type.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight:2Kg approx.
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
3
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
2
Modules (continuation)
Digital Communications
EDICOM1. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction
3.- Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The module consists of a board for studying the principles of Sampling
Theorem. Internally the board generates a 1 KHz. signal which shall be
used as the transmitted signal, as well as five different sampling
frequency signals. The board also contains a circuit for calculating the
time percentage used in each sampling period when the signal is
sampled.
Sampling frequencies: 2,4,8,16, and 32 KHz.
Sampling utilization factor: variable 0-90% using 10% stepping.
Two low-pass filters; cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz., of 2nd. and 4th. order,
for receiving, as the filter's order increases its gradient is stronger,
allowing a better reconstruction.
There is an output for the sampled signal, and another for the sampling
and maintenance of the signal.
There exists the possibility of introducing a sampled or pure signal,
external to the board.
Allows faults simulation.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Description of the principles of signal sampling and
reconstructions.
2.- Visualization of the main signals involved in a sampling
process.
3.- Analysis of the whole signal sampling and reconstruction
cycle.
4.- Comparison of the use of a 2nd. against 4th. order filter in
the recovery process of a signal.
5.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM2. Time Division Multiplexing (T.D.M.).PAM Transmitter and Receiver
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module consists of a board for studying Pulse Amplitude
Modulation and Demodulation (PAM), and Time Division Multiplex
(TDM). Sampling and time division multiplex are analyzed for each
channel.
It includes analog tetrapolar switches installed both in the transmitter
and the receiver for channel multiplexing and demultiplexing.
Input channels: 4 TDM and PAM.
Analog channels: 250 Hz., 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz.
Sampling frequency: 16 KHz per channel.
Sampling utilization factor: variable with transmission from 0 to 90%
using 10% steps per channel.
Analog channels: 250 Hz., 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz, variable
amplitude with potentiometer.
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz.
Three operation modes, allowing verification of the receiver's
complexity and channel usage, depending on the transmitted
information. Possibility of transmitting externally supplied signals.
The board permits introducing faults simulation using a
switchboard, thus enabling the student to study in depth the board's
operation and localization of faults.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of the principles of Time Division Multiplex
(TDM).
2.- Analysis of the features of the Transmitter, the Receiver and all
the other circuits.
3.- Comparison between different operation modes, varying
with their connections.
4.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM3. MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module consists of two boards for studying the modulation
of a two-channel MIC-TDM system:
Transmission board (EDICOM 3.1).
Reception board (EDICOM 3.2).
Here is analyzed analog signal transmission using two-channel
sampling, multiplexing, and coding, thus generating a lay transmitted
to the receiver which recovers the two analog signals.
The module also allows checking error codes.
Input channels: two PCM channels.
Codes generated by the transmitter: pseudo random for the
synchronizing signal.
Error checking: even and odd parity, and Hamming code.
Includes two continuos signal generators of 1 and 2 KHz, and another
two direct current signal generators, all of them of variable amplitude
using potentiometer.
Possibility of faults simulation.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of transmission in a two-channel MIC-TDM system.
2.- Study of the transmitter characteristic codes.
3.- Analysis of receiver operation varying the transmitter output
signal.
4.- Use of synchronizing code sequences for data transmission.
5.- Use of the clock generation circuit for reducing connections
between transmitter and receiver to a single one.
6.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM4. Delta Modulation and Demodulation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module consists of a board for studying Delta, Adaptive Delta and
Delta/Sigma Modulation.
Delta modulation transforms an analog signal into a stream of digital
data, transmitting one bit every time the analog signal is sampled. Later
on the analog signal must be rebuilt at the receiver.
This modulation has some drawbacks depending on various
parameters, for example the variation slope of the analog signal to be
transmitted at the sampling frequency. Due to this there are different
types of delta modulation.
This module allows to show the three main deltas: Delta modulation.
Adaptive-delta modulation. Sigma-delta modulation.
This allows the study of the parameters: sampling frequency, sampling
step size, and analog input signal frequency and amplitude. Sampling
frequencies: 32, 64, 128, and 256 KHz.
Low-pass "Butterworth” filter with cutoff frequency at 3.4 KHz.
Transmitter and receiver in-built integrators enabling selection of four
different gains using switches or automatic gain variation.
Includes four input signals at 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz, and
also a direct current signal, all of them of variable amplitude and
potentiometer, as well as the possibility of introducing an external
signal.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 32
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of Delta, Adaptive Delta, and Delta Sigma
Modulation.
2.- Construction of a Delta Modulator/Demodulator system.
3.- Construction of an Adaptive Delta Modulator/Demodulator
system.
4.- Construction of a Sigma-Delta Modulator/Demodulator
system.
3.1-Basic
Analog
Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
2.1Electronics
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
2
Digital Communications
(continuation)
EDICOM5. Line Codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1.- Analysis of line codes used for short-distance digital
trans-mission: NRZ(L), NRZ(M), RZ, AMI, RB, Two-phase
(Manchester), and Two-phase (Mark).
2.- Relationship between binary mode and modulation rate.
3.- Analysis of digital modulation techniques: ASK, PSK, FSK,
and QPSK, studying their features at the transmitter and the
demodulation at the receiver.
4.- Faults simulation.
5.- Requires “EDICOM 3” module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM6. Fibre Optic Transmission/Reception
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This module consists of one board for studying optical fibre
transmission and reception.
Different methods comprising the modulation of a light source are
described: amplitude modulation, frequency modulation, signal pulsewidth modulation; as well as their subsequent recovery and
reconstruction.
Transmission medium: optical fibre cable. Sources: analog and digital.
Two optical fibre transmission and reception circuits. Maximum
transmitter frequency: 300 KHz. 4th order low-pass filter with cutoff
frequency at 3.4 KHz. Interface RS232.
This module may be used together with EDICOM 4 to enable its better
use, though it may also be used independently.
Faults simulation.
1.- Analysis of optical fibre transmission and reception.
2.- Analysis of the various methods used for modulating a beam
of light: amplitude modulation and pulse-width modulation.
3.- Analysis of the transmission of digital signals using optical
fibre.
4.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
3
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software. Both are interconnected so that the teacher knows at any
moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students. These, on the
other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the information on
the subject of study.
+
Module
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, showing how to
complete the circuits and get the right information from them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Analog Communications:
- ED-CAM/SOF. AM Communications.
- ED-CFM/SOF. FM Communications.
Digital Communications
- EDICOM 1/SOF. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction.
- EDICOM 2/SOF.
- EDICOM 3/SOF.
- EDICOM 4/SOF.
- EDICOM 5/SOF.
- EDICOM 6/SOF.
Time Division Multiplex(TDM). PAM Transmitter and Receiver.
MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception.
Delta Modulation and Demodulation.
Line codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation.
Optical Fibre Transmission/Reception.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 33
www.edibon.com
3.- Communications
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This module consists of two boards for studying data conditioning:
Transmission board (EDICOM 5.1): for data coding and
signal modulation.
Reception board (EDICOM 5.2): for signal demodulation
and data decoding.
The aim is to study carrier modulation/demodulation techniques: ASK,
PSK, FSK, and QPSK.
Also to study data coding formats: NRZ(L), NRZ(M), RZ, Two-phase
(Manchester), and Two-phase (Mark).
Carrier wave frequency: 1.44 MHz, (I) 960 KHz, (Q) 960 KHz.
It Includes two carrier modulators and two unipolar-bipolar converters.
Elements: a data inverter, an amplifier-adder, and bit decoder installed
in the receiver.
For completing the practices, it is necessary to use the boards of
Module EDICOM 3.
The EDICOM 5.2 board contains all the demodulators and circuitry
needed for recovering the signal.
Faults simulation.
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
3
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software (continuation)
3
LICOMBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.*Although only the
purchased areas will be activated and ready to use.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Cables to
interface
Connection
points
4
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
3.- Communications
4
(continuation)
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS system,
information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF.
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
a computer slot.
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with the
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
only difference that for this one, the sampling
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
rate to 250,000 S/s .
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 34
DAIB
DAB
issue:01/11
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0321-320/10S
ITEM
REFERENCE
1 / 2
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LICOMBA
COMMUNICATIONS INTEGRATED LABORATORY,
FORMED BY:
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
EDICOM1
SIGNAL SAMPLING AND RECONSTRUCTION MODULE
1
3
EDICOM1/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SIGNAL SAMPLING AND RECONSTRUCTION
10
4
EDICOM1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR SIGNAL
SAMPLING AND RECONSTRUCTION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
5
EDICOM2
TDM-PAM TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER MODULE
1
6
EDICOM2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF TIME
DIVISION MULTIPLEXING (TDM). PAM
TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER.
10
7
EDICOM2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR TDMPAM TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
8
EDICOM3
PCM-TDM TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION MODULE
1
9
EDICOM3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF PCMTDM TRANSMITTER AND RECEIVER
10
10
EDICOM3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR PCMTDM TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
11
EDICOM4
DELTA MODULATION/DEMODULATION MODULE
1
12
EDICOM4/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
DELTA MODULATION /DEMODULATION
10
13
EDICOM4/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR DELTA
MODULATION/DEMODULATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
14
EDICOM5
LINE CODES. SIGNAL MODULATION AND
DEMODULATION MODULE
1
15
EDICOM5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF LINE
CODES. SIGNAL MODULATION AND DEMODULATION
10
16
EDICOM5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR LINES
CODES. SIGNAL MODULATION AND DEMODULATION
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
17
EDICOM6
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMISION/RECEPTION MODULE
1
18
EDICOM6/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMISION AND RECEPTION
10
19
EDICOM6/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR FIBRE
OPTIC TRANSMISION AND RECEPTION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
20
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
21
EDAS/VIS-1.25
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (1.250.000 samples
per second), FORMED BY:
1
Ref: 0321-320/10S
ITEM
21
2 / 2
REFERENCE
VIS
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
22
0320PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
23
0320PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
24
0320IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
25
0320CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
26
0320TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
27
0320MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
3
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
3.- Communications
2
Modules
1
(power supply needed)
Available analog
communications modules:
Power Supply
2
Modules
(power supply needed)
Available digital
communications modules:
FA-CO
(EDICOM1)
(ED-CAM)
or
EBC-100
(EDICOM2)
(ED-CFM)
3
CAI.Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
INS/SOF.
Instructor Software
(EDICOM3)
+
Student/Module Software
4
LICOMBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
(EDICOM4)
Teaching
Technique
used
(EDICOM5)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Teaching
Technique
used
DAIB.
Data acquisition interface box
(EDICOM6)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
The Complete Laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply
+ Module/s is the minimum supply).
Available Modules
Analog Communications
- ED-CAM. AM Communications.
- ED-CFM. FM Communications.
Digital Communications
-
EDICOM 1. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction.
EDICOM 2. Time Division Multiplex (TDM). PAM Transmitter and Receiver.
EDICOM 3. MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception.
EDICOM 4. Delta Modulation and Demodulation.
EDICOM 5. Line codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation.
EDICOM 6. Optical Fibre Transmission and Reception.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 30
3.1-Basic
Analog
Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
2.1Electronics
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
(continuation)
(continuation)
1
Power Supply
FA-CO. Power Supply
EBC-100. Base Unit (optional)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector.
This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from ED-CAM, ED-CFM and EDICOM type.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight:2Kg approx.
2
Modules
They consist on electronic boards which permit the student to do the exercises/practices corresponding to the target subject. On these modules the circuits to be designed are
serigraphed. Real components are displayed to familiarize the student with them. There are many points where measures can be taken (voltage, current intensity, resistance,
etc.). Moreover, circuit and electronic component faults can be simulated too. Every Module has its own manual, that gives the theoretical knowledge and explains everything
the student needs to carry out the exercise /practice. We provide eight manuals per module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included.
Power supply needeed.
Dimensions (approx.) of each module= 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Analog Communications
ED-CAM. AM Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The module consist of two different boards:
One is the transmitter, the other one the receiver.
Communication between them may be through connecting cables or
by antennas.
Modulation study:
D.S.B.: Double Sideband.
S.S.B.: Single Sideband.
DSB-SC: Double Sideband with Suppressed Carrier.
Also contains an audio amplifier and a loudspeaker. Adjustable audio
volume through the amplifier.
Output signal selector through loudspeaker or headphones.
Sixteen error commuter switches (eight per board).
Telescopic antenna.
Numbered testing points for measurements using an oscilloscope.
Transmitter specifications:
DSB output frequency: 1 Mhz. SSB output frequency:1.4 MHz.
DSB MODULATOR, consisting of: a crystal oscillator (1
MHz.); a balanced modulator and a band-pass filter N.1; and
a ceramic pass-band filter.
SSB MODULATOR, consisting of: an oscillator of 455
kHz.; a balanced modulator; a ceramic pass-band filter; and
a balanced modulator and pass-band filter N.2
Receiver specifications:
Type: Superheterodyne.
Two Detectors:
Detector diode for demodulation of AM-DSB.
Product detector for demodulation of AM-SSB.
Frequency range: 525 Hz. to 1605 KHz.
Intermediate frequency: 455 KHz.
Blocks: Local oscillator; BFO; Product detector;
Radio-frequencyamplifier; mixer; two intermediate frequency amplifiers; AGC (automatic gain control); and an
audio amplifier.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of the main features of the transmitter and the
receiver.
2.- Analysis of modulation:
D.S.B.: Double Sideband.
S.S.B.: Single Sideband.
3.- Signal modulation using AM-DSB :
Carrier modulation.
Amplitude modulation.
Frequency modulation.
Analysis of DSB modulation.
Diode detector operation.
Superheterodyne receiver operation.
AM-DSB signal reception and demodulation.
Generation of DSB modulated signals.
4.- Signal modulation using AM- SSB :
Analysis of SSB modulation.
Analysis of the AM-SSB demodulator.
Analysis of BFO (heterodyne oscillator).
AM-SSB signal reception and demodulation.
5.- Analysis of the Image Frequency.
6.- Adjustment of Tuning Circuits.
7.- Error Generator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
ED-CFM. FM Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The module consists of a single board for studying FM
communications, including transmission and reception, and also noise
effects existing in communication.
The board includes two frequency modulators and five discriminator
circuits.
Alternatively it is possible to modulate the amplitude of the FM signal
using an external noise input signal.
Transmitter:
Modulator circuits: Reactor and Varactor.
Output frequency: 455 KHz.
Frequency range of the audio oscillator: 300 Hz. to 3.4 KHz.
Receiver:
Demodulator circuits: Tuner resonator, square-law
detector, ratio discriminator, synchronous detector, and a
Foster-Seeley discriminator.
Low-pass filter/Amplifiers.
Filter cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz.
Eight commuter switches.
Testing points for measurements using an oscilloscope.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Introduction:
Main features of the FM transmitter-receiver board.
2.- FM Modulation:
Analysis of the reactor modulator.
Analysis of the varactor modulator.
3.- Frequency Demodulation Techniques:
Analysis of the Untuned Resonant Circuit.
Analysis of the Quadratic Detector.
Analysis of the Foster-Seeley Detector.
Analysis of the Ratio Detector.
Analysis of the Closed-Loop Phase Detector Circuit.
4.- Adjustment of Tuning Circuits.
5.- Error Generator.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/analog/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 31
www.edibon.com
3.- Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from ED-CAM, ED-CFM and EDICOM type.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight:2Kg approx.
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
3
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
2
Modules (continuation)
Digital Communications
EDICOM1. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction
3.- Communications
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The module consists of a board for studying the principles of Sampling
Theorem. Internally the board generates a 1 KHz. signal which shall be
used as the transmitted signal, as well as five different sampling
frequency signals. The board also contains a circuit for calculating the
time percentage used in each sampling period when the signal is
sampled.
Sampling frequencies: 2,4,8,16, and 32 KHz.
Sampling utilization factor: variable 0-90% using 10% stepping.
Two low-pass filters; cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz., of 2nd. and 4th. order,
for receiving, as the filter's order increases its gradient is stronger,
allowing a better reconstruction.
There is an output for the sampled signal, and another for the sampling
and maintenance of the signal.
There exists the possibility of introducing a sampled or pure signal,
external to the board.
Allows faults simulation.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Description of the principles of signal sampling and
reconstructions.
2.- Visualization of the main signals involved in a sampling
process.
3.- Analysis of the whole signal sampling and reconstruction
cycle.
4.- Comparison of the use of a 2nd. against 4th. order filter in
the recovery process of a signal.
5.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM2. Time Division Multiplexing (T.D.M.).PAM Transmitter and Receiver
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module consists of a board for studying Pulse Amplitude
Modulation and Demodulation (PAM), and Time Division Multiplex
(TDM). Sampling and time division multiplex are analyzed for each
channel.
It includes analog tetrapolar switches installed both in the transmitter
and the receiver for channel multiplexing and demultiplexing.
Input channels: 4 TDM and PAM.
Analog channels: 250 Hz., 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz.
Sampling frequency: 16 KHz per channel.
Sampling utilization factor: variable with transmission from 0 to 90%
using 10% steps per channel.
Analog channels: 250 Hz., 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz, variable
amplitude with potentiometer.
Low-pass filter cutoff frequency: 3.4 KHz.
Three operation modes, allowing verification of the receiver's
complexity and channel usage, depending on the transmitted
information. Possibility of transmitting externally supplied signals.
The board permits introducing faults simulation using a
switchboard, thus enabling the student to study in depth the board's
operation and localization of faults.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of the principles of Time Division Multiplex
(TDM).
2.- Analysis of the features of the Transmitter, the Receiver and all
the other circuits.
3.- Comparison between different operation modes, varying
with their connections.
4.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM3. MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module consists of two boards for studying the modulation
of a two-channel MIC-TDM system:
Transmission board (EDICOM 3.1).
Reception board (EDICOM 3.2).
Here is analyzed analog signal transmission using two-channel
sampling, multiplexing, and coding, thus generating a lay transmitted
to the receiver which recovers the two analog signals.
The module also allows checking error codes.
Input channels: two PCM channels.
Codes generated by the transmitter: pseudo random for the
synchronizing signal.
Error checking: even and odd parity, and Hamming code.
Includes two continuos signal generators of 1 and 2 KHz, and another
two direct current signal generators, all of them of variable amplitude
using potentiometer.
Possibility of faults simulation.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of transmission in a two-channel MIC-TDM system.
2.- Study of the transmitter characteristic codes.
3.- Analysis of receiver operation varying the transmitter output
signal.
4.- Use of synchronizing code sequences for data transmission.
5.- Use of the clock generation circuit for reducing connections
between transmitter and receiver to a single one.
6.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM4. Delta Modulation and Demodulation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module consists of a board for studying Delta, Adaptive Delta and
Delta/Sigma Modulation.
Delta modulation transforms an analog signal into a stream of digital
data, transmitting one bit every time the analog signal is sampled. Later
on the analog signal must be rebuilt at the receiver.
This modulation has some drawbacks depending on various
parameters, for example the variation slope of the analog signal to be
transmitted at the sampling frequency. Due to this there are different
types of delta modulation.
This module allows to show the three main deltas: Delta modulation.
Adaptive-delta modulation. Sigma-delta modulation.
This allows the study of the parameters: sampling frequency, sampling
step size, and analog input signal frequency and amplitude. Sampling
frequencies: 32, 64, 128, and 256 KHz.
Low-pass "Butterworth” filter with cutoff frequency at 3.4 KHz.
Transmitter and receiver in-built integrators enabling selection of four
different gains using switches or automatic gain variation.
Includes four input signals at 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 KHz, and 2 KHz, and
also a direct current signal, all of them of variable amplitude and
potentiometer, as well as the possibility of introducing an external
signal.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 32
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Analysis of Delta, Adaptive Delta, and Delta Sigma
Modulation.
2.- Construction of a Delta Modulator/Demodulator system.
3.- Construction of an Adaptive Delta Modulator/Demodulator
system.
4.- Construction of a Sigma-Delta Modulator/Demodulator
system.
3.1-Basic
Analog
Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
2.1Electronics
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
2
Digital Communications
(continuation)
EDICOM5. Line Codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
1.- Analysis of line codes used for short-distance digital
trans-mission: NRZ(L), NRZ(M), RZ, AMI, RB, Two-phase
(Manchester), and Two-phase (Mark).
2.- Relationship between binary mode and modulation rate.
3.- Analysis of digital modulation techniques: ASK, PSK, FSK,
and QPSK, studying their features at the transmitter and the
demodulation at the receiver.
4.- Faults simulation.
5.- Requires “EDICOM 3” module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
EDICOM6. Fibre Optic Transmission/Reception
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This module consists of one board for studying optical fibre
transmission and reception.
Different methods comprising the modulation of a light source are
described: amplitude modulation, frequency modulation, signal pulsewidth modulation; as well as their subsequent recovery and
reconstruction.
Transmission medium: optical fibre cable. Sources: analog and digital.
Two optical fibre transmission and reception circuits. Maximum
transmitter frequency: 300 KHz. 4th order low-pass filter with cutoff
frequency at 3.4 KHz. Interface RS232.
This module may be used together with EDICOM 4 to enable its better
use, though it may also be used independently.
Faults simulation.
1.- Analysis of optical fibre transmission and reception.
2.- Analysis of the various methods used for modulating a beam
of light: amplitude modulation and pulse-width modulation.
3.- Analysis of the transmission of digital signals using optical
fibre.
4.- Faults simulation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
3
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software. Both are interconnected so that the teacher knows at any
moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students. These, on the
other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the information on
the subject of study.
+
Module
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, showing how to
complete the circuits and get the right information from them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
Analog Communications:
- ED-CAM/SOF. AM Communications.
- ED-CFM/SOF. FM Communications.
Digital Communications
- EDICOM 1/SOF. Signals Sampling and Reconstruction.
- EDICOM 2/SOF.
- EDICOM 3/SOF.
- EDICOM 4/SOF.
- EDICOM 5/SOF.
- EDICOM 6/SOF.
Time Division Multiplex(TDM). PAM Transmitter and Receiver.
MIC-TDM Transmission/Reception.
Delta Modulation and Demodulation.
Line codes. Signal Modulation and Demodulation.
Optical Fibre Transmission/Reception.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 33
www.edibon.com
3.- Communications
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
This module consists of two boards for studying data conditioning:
Transmission board (EDICOM 5.1): for data coding and
signal modulation.
Reception board (EDICOM 5.2): for signal demodulation
and data decoding.
The aim is to study carrier modulation/demodulation techniques: ASK,
PSK, FSK, and QPSK.
Also to study data coding formats: NRZ(L), NRZ(M), RZ, Two-phase
(Manchester), and Two-phase (Mark).
Carrier wave frequency: 1.44 MHz, (I) 960 KHz, (Q) 960 KHz.
It Includes two carrier modulators and two unipolar-bipolar converters.
Elements: a data inverter, an amplifier-adder, and bit decoder installed
in the receiver.
For completing the practices, it is necessary to use the boards of
Module EDICOM 3.
The EDICOM 5.2 board contains all the demodulators and circuitry
needed for recovering the signal.
Faults simulation.
3.1- Analog Communications / 3.2- Digital Communications
3
LICOMBA. Communications Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software (continuation)
3
LICOMBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.*Although only the
purchased areas will be activated and ready to use.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Cables to
interface
Connection
points
4
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
3.- Communications
4
(continuation)
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS system,
information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF.
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
a computer slot.
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with the
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
only difference that for this one, the sampling
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
rate to 250,000 S/s .
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/communications/digital/LICOMBA.pdf
Page 34
DAIB
DAB
issue:01/11
ANALOG AND DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS (5 EBC-100)
Ref: 0321/5B
ITEM
1
1 / 1
REFERENCE
EBC-100
DESCRIPTION
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
QTY.
5
issue:01/11
TELEPHONY MODULE
Ref: 0330
1 / 1
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
CODITEL
CODITEL. Trainer
CODITEL/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
TELEPHONY SYSTEMS TRAINER, COMPUTER
CONTROLED. FORMED BY:
TELEPHONY SYSTEMS TRAINIER INCLUDING THE
CONTROL INTEFACE
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TELEPHONY SYSTEMS
TRAINER
QTY.
1
1
1
2
CODITEL/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TELEPHONY SYSTEMS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
3
0330PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
0330PA
PARTIDA ALZADA
1
5
0330IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
0330CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
0330TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
0330MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
3.3- Telephony
CODITEL. Telephony Systems Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2
Computer Control
Software
Computer
(not included
in the supply)
3 Cables and Accessories
4 Manuals
1
Unit: CODITEL.
Telephony Systems Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
CODITEL. Trainer:
CODITEL is a digital circuit commutation unit for didactic purposes. Its structure is like a temporal commutator structure with
two MIC ways, one inlet way and one outlet way. Basically, it follows the recommendation of the CCITT and of Telephony.
System is mounted on a desktop box.
Diagram in the front panel of the unit with the same structure as the real hardware. Provides access to all main signals.
Follows all the recommendations of CCITT (Cosultive Comitte International Telephony and Telegraphy). Structure is based on
the standard for digital commutation systems.
Time division multiplexing(TDM) and Pulse code Modulation (PCM) principles.
Communication based on a temporal commutator that supports up to fifteen complete internal communications with two MIC
ways, one inlet way and one outlet way.
Standard MIC system of 32 channels with dynamic assignament and frame synchronization. 30 channels used for voice
transmission and 2 used for signalling and synchronism. Signal conversion using standard codec, 8 KHz of sample rate, 8 bits
per sample and 64Kb/s per channel and 2,048 Mb/s system frame.
Internal hardware consists of two electronics boards: an analog board with all integrated and discrete analog elements and a
digital board based on FPGA technology.
Structure integrated with all the internal common elements in a telephone system: subscriber´s line, tone generator, base of
times, filtering stage, switching matrix, number decoders and control memory.
Two subscriber`s lines implemented with discrete elements (hybrid coils, ring circuit, supply circuit).
Two subscriber`s lines implemented with integrated elements Subscriber`s Line Interface Circuits (SLIC).
Functions as battery feed, overvoltage protection, ringing, coding and decoding, supervision, signalling, 2-4 wires conversion
and test( BORSCHT functions) covered, in each line.
High precision digital tone synthetizer 400 Hz (dial invitation tone, call recapturing tone and busy tone) using Direct Digital
Synthetizer (DDS).
Four commercial receptors (telephones), two used for signaling by pulses and other two for tones or Dual Tone Multi
Frequency Signalling (DTMF).
Switching memory matrix, control memory and base of times implemented with FPGA technology with high stability and
fiability.
Standard RS232 protocol for communication between the PC and the trainer.
2 CODITEL/CCSOF. Computer Control and Graphic Visualization Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. It is executed under windows operating system 2000 or higher.
Compatible with the industry standards.
In combination with the hardware, Coditel Software is supplied with the system.
Coditel software has a user friendly graphical interface that provides totally control and visualization of the telephone system.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
1
Some Practical Possibilities of the Unit
1.- To study the main actions and signals
involved in a digital commutation.
2.- To study the dynamic channel
assignment and temporal switching.
3.- To study the standards for audio
conversion.
4.- To establish of a communication
between some channels step by step.
5.- Visual monitoring of the main states
that a line goes through during a call.
6.- To configure lines as only receiver,
transmitter, receiver / transmitter.
7.- To test of the conversion from 2 to 4
wires.
8.- To study the electric stages when the
user makes actions over the
telephone.
9.- To study the signals involved when
dialing by pulses.
10.- To study the signals involved when
dialing by tones.
11.- To study the tone signal.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/es/units/communications/telephony/CODITEL.pdf
3.4- Global Positioning Systems (GPS)
EGPS. GPS Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This EGPS trainer will provide a basic understanding of the GPS
Fundamentals, Satellite & Design Aspects of GPS Receiver by actually
connecting to the Satellite by GPS Antenna.
Metallic box.
Power Supply.
GPS Unit.
Serial Cable M/F.
Mains lead.
GPS Antenna.
Software CD.
PC Interface - RS232 Port.
Cables and accessories, for normal operation.
Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.): 310 x 220 x 145 mm.
Weight: 3 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/communications/appliedcommunications/EGPS.pdf
Page 35
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.-
To understand the concept of GPS.
Navigation concepts.
Noise and signal to noise ratio
concepts.
Establishing link between GPS
Satellite & GPS trainer.
To Study effect of DOP.
Study of HDOP & VDOP.
Measurement of longitude &
latitude.
Study of useful conversion formulas.
Study of UTC data and time.
Study of PRN code.
Anaysis of NMEA 0183 protocols.
Study of Common N MEA Sentence
Protocol like, GPGGA, GPGLL,
GPGSA, GPGSV, GPRMC, GPVTG.
Other GPS NMEA Sentenses like,
GPALM, GPGRS, GPGST, GPMSS,
GPZDA.
Analysis of Elevation Azimuth SNR.
www.edibon.com
3.- Communications
EDIBON Computer Control System
issue:01/11
APPLIED COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
Ref: 0340
ITEM
1 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
EGPS
GPS TRAINER
1
2
EGPS/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF GPS
TRAINER
1
3
EGPS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR GPS
TRAINER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
4
EAN
ANTENNA TRAINER
1
5
EAN/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
ANTENNA TRAINER
1
6
EAN/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
ANTENNA TRAINER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
7
ESA
SATELLITE TRAINER
1
8
ESA/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
SATELLITE TRAINER
1
9
ESA/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
SATELLITE TRAINER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
10
EMI
MICROWAVE TRAINER
1
11
EMI/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
MICROWAVE TRAINER
1
12
EMI/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
MICROWAVE TRAINER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
13
EBL
BLUETOOTH TRAINER
1
14
EBL/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
BLUETOOTH TRAINER
1
15
EBL/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
BLUETOOTH TRAINER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
16
ETM
CELLULAR MOBILE TRAINER
1
17
ETM/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
CELLULAR MOBILE TRAINER
1
18
ETM/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CELLULAR MOBILE TRAINER (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
19
ERA/SOF *
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
RADAR TRAINER
1
20
ERA/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR RADAR
TRAINER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
21
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
22
EDAS/VIS-0.25
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
1
Ref: 0340
ITEM
22
2 / 3
REFERENCE
VIS
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
23
0340PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
24
0340PA
PARTIDA ALZADA
1
25
0340IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
26
0340CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
27
0340TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
28
0340MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0340
3 / 3
SPECIFICATIONS:
-Mini-ESN system main possibilities:
. 30 students “simultaneously” work.
. Any student can work simultaneously doing “Real Time Control”.
. The teacher "can see" in his computer what any student is doing in any computer at any time.
. The unit and system can be visualised simultaneously in "n" screens.
This system is common for any EDIBON Computer Control unit, but need individual Software Applications for each
particular unit.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
With this module 30 students working simulatenously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
3.3- Telephony
CODITEL. Telephony Systems Trainer
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2
Computer Control
Software
Computer
(not included
in the supply)
3 Cables and Accessories
4 Manuals
1
Unit: CODITEL.
Telephony Systems Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
CODITEL. Trainer:
CODITEL is a digital circuit commutation unit for didactic purposes. Its structure is like a temporal commutator structure with
two MIC ways, one inlet way and one outlet way. Basically, it follows the recommendation of the CCITT and of Telephony.
System is mounted on a desktop box.
Diagram in the front panel of the unit with the same structure as the real hardware. Provides access to all main signals.
Follows all the recommendations of CCITT (Cosultive Comitte International Telephony and Telegraphy). Structure is based on
the standard for digital commutation systems.
Time division multiplexing(TDM) and Pulse code Modulation (PCM) principles.
Communication based on a temporal commutator that supports up to fifteen complete internal communications with two MIC
ways, one inlet way and one outlet way.
Standard MIC system of 32 channels with dynamic assignament and frame synchronization. 30 channels used for voice
transmission and 2 used for signalling and synchronism. Signal conversion using standard codec, 8 KHz of sample rate, 8 bits
per sample and 64Kb/s per channel and 2,048 Mb/s system frame.
Internal hardware consists of two electronics boards: an analog board with all integrated and discrete analog elements and a
digital board based on FPGA technology.
Structure integrated with all the internal common elements in a telephone system: subscriber´s line, tone generator, base of
times, filtering stage, switching matrix, number decoders and control memory.
Two subscriber`s lines implemented with discrete elements (hybrid coils, ring circuit, supply circuit).
Two subscriber`s lines implemented with integrated elements Subscriber`s Line Interface Circuits (SLIC).
Functions as battery feed, overvoltage protection, ringing, coding and decoding, supervision, signalling, 2-4 wires conversion
and test( BORSCHT functions) covered, in each line.
High precision digital tone synthetizer 400 Hz (dial invitation tone, call recapturing tone and busy tone) using Direct Digital
Synthetizer (DDS).
Four commercial receptors (telephones), two used for signaling by pulses and other two for tones or Dual Tone Multi
Frequency Signalling (DTMF).
Switching memory matrix, control memory and base of times implemented with FPGA technology with high stability and
fiability.
Standard RS232 protocol for communication between the PC and the trainer.
2 CODITEL/CCSOF. Computer Control and Graphic Visualization Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. It is executed under windows operating system 2000 or higher.
Compatible with the industry standards.
In combination with the hardware, Coditel Software is supplied with the system.
Coditel software has a user friendly graphical interface that provides totally control and visualization of the telephone system.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 20 Kg.
1
Some Practical Possibilities of the Unit
1.- To study the main actions and signals
involved in a digital commutation.
2.- To study the dynamic channel
assignment and temporal switching.
3.- To study the standards for audio
conversion.
4.- To establish of a communication
between some channels step by step.
5.- Visual monitoring of the main states
that a line goes through during a call.
6.- To configure lines as only receiver,
transmitter, receiver / transmitter.
7.- To test of the conversion from 2 to 4
wires.
8.- To study the electric stages when the
user makes actions over the
telephone.
9.- To study the signals involved when
dialing by pulses.
10.- To study the signals involved when
dialing by tones.
11.- To study the tone signal.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/es/units/communications/telephony/CODITEL.pdf
3.4- Global Positioning Systems (GPS)
EGPS. GPS Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This EGPS trainer will provide a basic understanding of the GPS
Fundamentals, Satellite & Design Aspects of GPS Receiver by actually
connecting to the Satellite by GPS Antenna.
Metallic box.
Power Supply.
GPS Unit.
Serial Cable M/F.
Mains lead.
GPS Antenna.
Software CD.
PC Interface - RS232 Port.
Cables and accessories, for normal operation.
Manuals: this unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.): 310 x 220 x 145 mm.
Weight: 3 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/communications/appliedcommunications/EGPS.pdf
Page 35
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14.-
To understand the concept of GPS.
Navigation concepts.
Noise and signal to noise ratio
concepts.
Establishing link between GPS
Satellite & GPS trainer.
To Study effect of DOP.
Study of HDOP & VDOP.
Measurement of longitude &
latitude.
Study of useful conversion formulas.
Study of UTC data and time.
Study of PRN code.
Anaysis of NMEA 0183 protocols.
Study of Common N MEA Sentence
Protocol like, GPGGA, GPGLL,
GPGSA, GPGSV, GPRMC, GPVTG.
Other GPS NMEA Sentenses like,
GPALM, GPGRS, GPGST, GPMSS,
GPZDA.
Analysis of Elevation Azimuth SNR.
www.edibon.com
3.- Communications
EDIBON Computer Control System
issue:01/11
ENERGY: MODULAR POWER SYSTEM SIMULATOR. BASIC MODULE
Ref: 0510
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
MPSSC
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
ERP-PD.
ERP-PDF.
ERP-MF
MODULAR POWER SYSTEM SIMULATOR WITH SCADA
CONTROL SYSTEM, FORMED BY:
SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM
BASIC FRAME
GENERATION GROUP
AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
AC MOTORS SPEED CONTROLLER
STEP-UP TRANSFORMER
STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER
TRANSMISSION LINES SIMULATION UNIT
ENERGY CONSUMPTION MODULE
BUSBAR MODEL 1 (GENERATION)
BUSBAR MODEL 2 (TRANSPORT)
BUSBAR MODEL 3 (COUPLING)
BUSBAR MODEL 4 (CONSUMPTION)
BUSBAR MODEL 5 (TRANSPORT)
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
SYNCHRONISMS MODULE
GENERATOR PROTECTION MODULE
GENERATORS PROTECTION AND CONTROL DEVICE
UNIT
DISTANCE PROTECTION RELAY UNIT
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION RELAY UNIT
FAULT INJECTION MODULE
1
1
1
2
0510PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0510PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0510IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0510CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0510TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0510MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
SCADA
BASB
EGMG/P
AVR/P
VVCA/MP
TRANS/3A
TRANS/3B
AE1.
AE11
BUS01
BUS02
BUS03
BUS04
BUS05
ALI01
IND05
INX20/P
ERP-PGC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 0510
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Modular Power System Simulator with
SCADA Control System
MPSSC
Technical Teaching Equipment
SCADA
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The “MPSSC” is a modular Power System Simulator with SCADA Control System, specially designed for Technicians at Technical and Vocational
level.
The simulator will include the main parts of a Power System as:
! Generation.
! Transformation.
! Transport.
! Distribution.
! Consumption.
It will include important and key elements that play a very important roll in a Power System control and protection, as:
- Automatic voltage regulator.
- Automatic frequency control.
- All the main protection relays involved.
- Automatic and Manual synchronization.
The simulator includes the following modules:
- SCADA Control System.
- EGMG/P. Generation Group.
- AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator.
- VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller.
- TRANS/3A. Step-up Transformer.
- TRANS/3B. Step-down Transformer.
- AE1. Transmission Lines Simulation Unit.
- AE11. Energy Consumption Module.
- BUS01. Busbar model 1 (Generation).
- BUS02. Busbar model 2 (Transport).
- BUS05. Busbar model 5 (Transport).
- BUS03. Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
- BUS04. Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
- ALI01. Power Supply.
- IND05. Synchronims Module.
- INX20/P. Generator Protection Module.
- ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit.
- ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module.
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management
(for Design, Manufacturing,
Commercialization and After-sales service)
European Union Certificate
(total safety)
Page 1
Certificates ISO 14000 and
ECO-Management and Audit Scheme
(environmental management)
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
(Worlddidac Member)
MODULES IN DETAIL
SCADA
SCADA Control System
Generation
Transport/Lines
Transformation
Consumption
TRANS/3A.
Step-up Transformer
EGMG/P. Generation Group
AE1.
Transmission Lines Simulation Unit
AE11.
Energy Consumption Module
TRANS/3B.
Step-down Transformer
AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator
VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller
Control and Protections
Busbars
-ALI01.
-INX20/P.
-IND05.
-BUS01.
Power Supply.
Generator Protection Module.
Synchronims Module.
Busbar model 1 (Generation).
-BUS02.
-BUS05.
-BUS03.
-BUS04.
Busbar model 2 (Transport).
Busbar model 5 (Transport).
Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit
Faults
ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module
Page 2
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System
SPECIFICATIONS
SCADA is an industry-standard supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) software for realistic experience of power system control.
For use with MPSSC Simulator to increase students´ understanding of power systems.
It can connect to multiple generation systems for remote control and supervision of local generation and distributed generation.
It includes alarms and logs data for detailed analysis of MPSSC during stable and transient operation.
It communicates with programmable logic controllers (PLCs), numerical protection relays, automatic voltage regulators and prime-mover
simulation device of the Power System Simulator to control and collect information from the power system.
Includes high performance computer with integrated communication interface to exchange information with all devices.
Remotely controls the generator and prime-mover of the MPSSC Simulator in different power system operation control methods (frequency
control, voltage control, active power control, reactive power control, power factor control, generators load exchange).
The SCADA connects to MPSSC to train students in supervision and control of power systems.
The package includes industrial-standard SCADA software, a computer, colour printer and communications hardware.
EDIBON supplies the software already installed on the computer. The software does several jobs, including remote control and data display and
logging. It includes programs written by EDIBON to match experiments which students have done directly with the MPSSC Simulator. The
software´s on-screen display or ´user interface´shows real-time data and mimics the circuit-breakers (opening and closing). It also mimics the
adjustment of the loads and any faults applied by the user. Other screens give details about the settings and data collected at each protection relay
or instrument on the simulator.
Students select the correct screen for the experiment they want to perform. They then use the computer to close circuit-breakers, set and adjust any
loads and connect the grid supply (or start the generator) by mean of touch screens, in others words, they configure the topology of the Simulator.
The generators synchronization can be performed in manual and automatic mode with the help of SCADA.
Students can use the software to log data from the simulator and analyse it, compare conditions before and after faults, and see the effects of
faults. They can use this information to predict power system problems and change the power system protection to prevent future problems.
The software includes the experiments already given with the MPSSC Simulator.
contiue...
Page 3
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS
The experiments include:
- Generator characteristics and performance.
- Transformers.
- Transmission, distribution and consumption.
- Power system protection.
- Power system operation and control in different modes.
- Power flow control.
- etc.
SCADA allows the control and supervision of the operations related to the generation, transformation, transmission and distribution of the
electrical energy made by the MPSSC Simulator.
Through a sophisticated human-machine interface, executed in a computer, it is possible to monitor and control a lot of events and alarms as well
as analyse, display and control the information acquired from all Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVRs),
protection relays and prime mover simulation device.
SCADA system is connected to the PLCs communication networks, protection relays and the rest of the units of the MPSSC Simulator, allowing the
data acquisition and control in real time from all the elements of the MPSSC Simulator. The acquired data are stored for their future analysis or
they are directly sent to screens connected to the computer as a visual information.
The objective of the SCADA developed architecture is centralising and automating all the control tasks, monitoring, protection and data
acquisition of the MPSSC Simulator is operated similar to local or central load dispatch center of Real Electrical Power System.
The equipments connected to the SCADA I make one or some of the following functions:
1.-
Respond to the commands of the control computer, in order to close or open all the circuit breaker contacts, power isolator and the rest
of the equipments that conform the topology of the Power System Simulator.
2.-
Transmit to SCADA the ON/OFF state of the electrical equipment that conform the Simulated Electrical Power System.
3.-
Vary all the set points of the controlled parameters, for example, the frequency control, active power, reactive power, power factor and
voltage control set point.
4.-
Measurement and management of all the acquired electrical parameters in different nodes and points of the simulated power system.
5.-
Protection of the electrical circuits and the equipments that conform the MPSSC Simulator.
SCADA allows making a control, supervision and data acquisition in a centralised and remote way, simulating a central generation dispatch
center.
With help of SCADA, students can observe the real time state of the electrical equipment of the MPSSC by means of graphical and state screens.
With SCADA, the operator of the electrical power system can monitor its state and consequently, it can act and make decisions about how to
operate in different conditions. For example, when there is a sound or visual alarm, the operator can see what is happening in a SCADA screen,
because the monitoring system includes an alarm sequences and events list of all the equipment operation, recordered throughout the practice
period and can done, reports about a determined operation or about the complete practice.
Another SCADA facility is that it allows visualise in a central way all the instrumentation of the MPSSC. Simulator through several screens with
digital and analogical virtual instruments.
In the MPSSC. Simulator, several multifunctional and numeric protection relays are used, because the study of the electrical protections is an
essential point for a electrical power system.
The protection relays include measurement, communication and programmable logic possibilities to done functions of monitories and control of
the equipment that are protecting. Thanks to these facilities, the protection functions are incorporated and managed from SCADA, making the
teaching of this subject easier in a automated and centralised way, because the students can communicate with each protection relay and
managed it remotely.
Page 4
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
Examples of some possibilities
Page 5
www.edibon.com
ALI01. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS
This module has the followings elements:
One three-phase power supply output connector.
One three-phase power supply output with red, yellow and green connectors.
Two single-phase power supply output.
One single-phase standard type power supply output.
Ground terminal.
One security key.
One emergency stop switch.
Module state indicators.
A removable key 6 with two positions (ON and OFF) acts as main switch.
EGMG/P. Generation Group
SPECIFICATIONS
This group has the followings elements:
1.One three-phase AC squirrel cage induction motor acting as generation prime mover.
2.One three-phase Synchronous generator with DC field excitation.
The induction motor is controlled from the VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller.
INX20/P. Generator Protection Module
SPECIFICATIONS
Page 6
www.edibon.com
VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller
SPECIFICATIONS
The VVCA/MP is an AC motor speed regulator.
The numerous inputs and outputs allow you to use the VVCA/MP for power supply standard asynchronous ac motor for simulation of prime mover
of generation system.
Each part of the VVCA/MP is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
Elements of the AVR/P:
Ground protection connector.
Three-Phase power output supply connectors.
Control enable/disable switch.
Remote/Local mode switch.
Local control set-point slider.
Input/Output ERP-PGC signal connector.
Input/Output AVR signal connector.
Power supply Switch.
The capacity range of VVCA/MP is for 3 ph 400 V supply from 0.4 kW to 7 kW. The overload capacity of VVCA/MP is 150% for 1 min and 200% for
3s (in High Duty mode). The inverters with capacities of 5.5 kW and above can be used in dual rating; this means that the same inverter can be
used for next higher capacity (in Low Duty mode). For example a 5.5 kW inverter can be used for a 7.5 kW motor; in this case the overload is 120%
for 1 min. The braking transistor is included as standard. The braking resistor is included as standard up to 7.5 kW units.
The main features of VVCA/MP are:
Safety enables input (compliant to EN954-1 category 3).
Built-in EMC filter for all capacities (compliant to EN 61800-3, category C3).
Sensorless vector control mode (100% torque at 0 Hz).
Advanced PID functions (dancer control).
Brake control function.
Logic gates for logic combination of input and output functions and delay timer (10steps). Positioning function (when encoder option is used).
3 slots for 3 different options at the same time (encoder, fieldbus, I/O expansion).
Removable control terminals (cage clamp type).
AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator
SPECIFICATIONS
The AVR/P is an Automatic Voltage Regulator that works in conjunction with the ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit.
The numerous inputs and outputs allow you to use the AVR/P for voltage, reactive power and power factor regulation of generation system.
Each part of the AVR/P is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
Elements of the AVR/P:
Ground protection connector.
Generator output voltage measurement connectors.
Generator Field excitation output supply connectors.
Voltage Control enable/disable switch.
Remote/Local mode switch.
Input/Output signal connector.
Local control set-point slider.
Serial Port connector( Software HMI is optional product).
Power supply Switch.
The AVR/P is an automatic voltage regulator of the latest design for synchronous generators and synchronous motors. The unit contains the most
advanced microprocessor technology together with IGBT semiconductor technology (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor).
This advanced-design automatic voltage regulator is used for the excitation of indirectly excited synchronous machines. This unit is only suitable for
this one area of application.
The regulator can also be switched over to function as a reactive power, power factor and field current regulator.
Page 7
www.edibon.com
TRANS/3A. Step-up Transformer
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase power transformer with group connection YyN0, 400/400V, 2kVA, 50-60Hz.
This unit simulates the STEP-UP transformer located in the transmission substation.
TRANS/3B. Step-down Transformer
SPECIFICATIONS
Three-phase power transformer with group connection YyN0, 400/230V, 2kVA, 50-60Hz.
This unit simulates the STEP-DOWN transformer located in the distribution substation.
IND05. Synchronims Module
SPECIFICATIONS
This module has the followings elements:
Phase Synchronization Lamps.
Phase RST sequences test connectors.
Page 8
www.edibon.com
Busbars
BUS01. Busbar model 1
(Generation)
BUS02. Busbar model 2
(Transport)
BUS05. Busbar model 5
(Transport)
BUS03. Busbar model 3
(Coupling)
BUS04. Busbar model 4
(Consumption)
SPECIFICATIONS
The finality of these modules is to represent the generation, transmission, distribution and subtransmission substations busbars and it included the
main commutation elements as power circuit breaker, isolating switches, double busbar. With the aid of these modules is possible to coupling or
decoupling all necessary elements of the power system simulator.
Basically the busbars modules have similar elements, as:
- Input/Outputs double BusBar power connectors.
- Single-phase power supply input.
- 89L-1 and 89L-2 isolators open/close selectors.
- 52L circuit breaker open/close selector.
- 89L-3 isolator open/close selector.
- Manual/Remote operation enable switch.
- Input/Output signals control connector.
Page 9
www.edibon.com
AE1. Transmission Lines Simulation Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
This unit represents basic concepts of the Electric Energy high-voltage three-phase transmission lines operation. It simulates a value modifying
concentrated parameter line that allows different configurations and consists on three conductorline (R, S, T) and a Neutral or return line (N).
Each of the phases is represented, following the concentrated parameters theoretical model, through a resistance series association and
inductance, along with a parallel association between each one of them in a capacitance effect.
A way to reduce the earth short circuit current is to have impedance in the neutral-to-ground connections. This impedance has no repercussion in
the normal functioning of the network but they introduce a repercussion in the increase of 3x Zo (impedance on the zero sequence component),
which reduces the short circuit current.
The return line is simulated through small value impedance that has a resistive-indicative characteristic. To simplify the effect, being a despicable
inductance, it will be simulated with a pure 10 resistance.
The phases have two terminals at the input and two at the output, and they are connected at the interior. Through one of them the module will be
supplied. Through the last one the natural circuit will continue to the load module, the bar module, the transformer, etc. The two terminals left en
every phase is left for assembly of protection relay or other parallel configurations.
The supply of this unit will be done through line terminals (R, S, and T) and the neutral (N) through a 400V three-phase supply and it will be
controlled by an interrupter-circuit breaker of 4 poles placed between the supply and the lines module.
In the phases we can distinguish different resistance and inductance values, being able to simulate different length transport lines.
The resistive part is formed by two resistance values of 15 and 33
obtaining two additions resistive values of 10.31 and 48 .
, with the possibility of making parallel-series connections between them,
The inductive part consists on a multistage coil of despicable resistance. In which it is possible to choose one of the following values:
33 mH, 78 mH, 140 mH, 193 mH, 236 mH
The capacitive part will be divided into capacitance between conductors and capacitance between line and ground.
The capacitance between conductors is simulated with a pair of capacitors at the beginning and at the end of the line with different values: 0.5 F
and 1 F for each conductor.
The capacitance between conductor and ground is 1 F and 2 F, also at the beginning and at the end of the line.
With all this values it is possible to simulate a great number of line configurations, beginning with different line distances with different types of
conductor, through the unbalanced lines with different conductors groups (Simplex, Duplex, Triplex and Cuadruplex). At the same time it is possible
to simulate transient state with different short-circuits injection using a fault injection module.
The unit is protected with a grounding connection that comes from the metallic caging and that is accessible through a terminal in the front of the
module.
Page 10
www.edibon.com
AE11. Energy Consumption Module
SPECIFICATIONS
With this module is possible to simulate any proper consumption in the power system or we can test any element of the power system separately
under different load conditions.
It has differentiated part on resistive, inductive and capacitive zones and it allows all types of combinations between them, so we can simulate pure
resistive, inductive and capacitive load as well as different series-parallel combination of them.
Metallic box.
Diagram in the front panel.
Variable resistive loads: 3 x [ 150 W (500 W) ].
Fixed resistive loads:
3 x [ 150 W (500 W) + 150 W (500 W) ].
Inductive loads:
6 x [ 0, 33, 78, 140, 193, 236 mH ].(2 A Max.).
Capacitive loads:
3 x [ 3 x 3.5 mF ] + 3 x [ 3 x 7 mF ] + 3 x [ 3 x 14 mF ].
Ground connector.
Page 11
www.edibon.com
ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
The ERP-PGC is a control unit for engine-generator simulator system.
The numerous inputs and outputs, along with a modular software structure, allow you to use the ERP-PGC for a wide range of applications with only
a single part number. This includes stand-by, AMF (automatic mains failure), peak shaving, import-export or distributed generation, among others.
Also the ERP-PGC is compatible for island, island parallel, mains parallel and multiple unit mains parallel operations.
Each part of the ERP-PGC is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
All the adjustments are executed with the management software from a PC.
Elements of the ERP-PGC:
Power input/output connectors.
Multifunction control and protection device.
Generator group control inputs and outputs connector.
Generator rotor to ground protection Relay.
Isolated operation connector(52GT state and 52G trip command).
Functions:
Prime mover control.
Engine, mains and generator protection.
Engine data measurement :
Oil pressure and temperature, coolant temperature, battery voltage, speed, service hours, etc.
Generator and mains data measurement:
Voltage, current, power, kVar, kW, kWh, etc.
Load/Var sharing for up to 32 participants.
Load-dependent start/stop.
Automatic, Manual, and Stop operating modes.
Application modes:
1.No CB (Circuit Breaker) operation.
2.Open GCB (Generator Circuit Breaker).
3.Open/close GCB.
4.Open/close GCB/MCB (Generator CB/Main Circuit Breaker).
Logics Manager for processing measured values, discrete inputs, and internal states.
Engine starter sequencing.
Alarm display with circuit breaker trip and engine shutdown.
AMF (automatic mains failure) standby genset control, with automatic engine start on mains failure detection and open transition breaker control.
Critical mode operation.
Synchronizing (phase matching and slip frequency) and mains parallel operation.
External frequency, voltage, power, and power factor set point control via analogue input or interface.
FIFO (First Input First Output) event history with 300 entries.
ECU data visualization via J1939.
CAN bus communication to engine controllers, plant management systems, expansion boards, and Toolkit configuration and visualization
software.
RS-485 Modbus communication with plant management systems.
RS-232 Modbus communication with plant management systems.
Page 12
www.edibon.com
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
The ERP-PD is a transmission line protection device.
The numerous inputs and outputs, along with a modular software structure, allow you to use the ERP-PD for study and analyze the performance of
different transmission line protection system.
Each part of the ERP-PD is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
All the adjustments are executed with the management software from a PC.
Elements of the ERP-PD:
Power input/output connectors.
Protection device.
Outputs connector for trip command.
Functions:
Protection:Optimize line protection with a system of sensitive, secure, and dependable three-pole trip relay elements.
Monitoring: Simplify fault and system disturbance analyses with event reports and Sequential Events Recorder.
Fault Locator: Isolate line problems, and restore service faster.
Automation.
Remote communications capabilities and elimination of external control elements.
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit
SPECIFICATIONS
The ERP-PDF is a differential protection device.
The numerous inputs and outputs, along with a modular software structure, allow you to use the ERP-PDF for study and analyze the performance of
different differential protection system.
Each part of the ERP-PDF is correctly identified in order to facilitate the operation and fast identification.
All the adjustments are executed with the management software from a PC.
Elements of the ERP-PDF:
Power input/output connectors.
Protection device.
Outputs connector for trip command.
Functions:
It provides current differential protection plus two complete groups of overcurrent elements in one compact package. The relay measures high- and
low-side currents, differential operate and restraint quantities, as well as second and fifth harmonics of the applied currents. The unit provides two
optoisolated inputs, four programmable output contacts, and one alarm output contact.
This relay can protect two-winding power transformers, reactors, generators, large motors, and other two-terminal power apparatus. The relay
settings permit you to use wye or delta connected high- and low-side current transformers. The relay compensates for various equipment and CT
connections to derive appropriate differential operating quantities.
The ERP-PDF provides three differential elements with dual slope characteristics. The second slope provides security against CT saturation for heavy
through faults.
Page 13
www.edibon.com
ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module
SPECIFICATIONS
The fault injection module have the possibility to inject different kind of short-circuits, in any point of the power system simulator including line
module, directly or through a pure resistive element.
Employing this element we can analyze line performance during transient state as well as analyze the line protection elements functionality.
The short-circuit injection possibility are:
Three-pole short-circuit.
Two-pole short-circuit.
Two-pole-ground short-circuit.
Single-pole-ground short-circuit.
Page 14
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
ENERGY: MODULAR POWER SIMULATOR (ESN)
Ref: 0511
ITEM
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
MPPSC/ESN
SCADA NET SYSTEM (ESN) FOR MODULAR POWER
SYSTEM SIMULATOR WITH SCADA CONTROL SYSTEM
(30 STUDENTS WORKING "SIMULTANEOUSLY")
1
2
0520PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0520PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0520IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0520CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0520TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0520MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0511
2 / 2
SPECIFICATIONS:
-Mini-ESN system main possibilities:
. 30 students “simultaneously” work.
. Any student can work simultaneously doing “Real Time Control”.
. The teacher "can see" in his computer what any student is doing in any computer at any time.
. The unit and system can be visualised simultaneously in "n" screens.
This system is common for any EDIBON Computer Control unit, but need individual Software Applications for each
particular unit.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
With this module 30 students working simulatenously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Modular Power System Simulator with
SCADA Control System
MPSSC
Technical Teaching Equipment
SCADA
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The “MPSSC” is a modular Power System Simulator with SCADA Control System, specially designed for Technicians at Technical and Vocational
level.
The simulator will include the main parts of a Power System as:
! Generation.
! Transformation.
! Transport.
! Distribution.
! Consumption.
It will include important and key elements that play a very important roll in a Power System control and protection, as:
- Automatic voltage regulator.
- Automatic frequency control.
- All the main protection relays involved.
- Automatic and Manual synchronization.
The simulator includes the following modules:
- SCADA Control System.
- EGMG/P. Generation Group.
- AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator.
- VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller.
- TRANS/3A. Step-up Transformer.
- TRANS/3B. Step-down Transformer.
- AE1. Transmission Lines Simulation Unit.
- AE11. Energy Consumption Module.
- BUS01. Busbar model 1 (Generation).
- BUS02. Busbar model 2 (Transport).
- BUS05. Busbar model 5 (Transport).
- BUS03. Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
- BUS04. Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
- ALI01. Power Supply.
- IND05. Synchronims Module.
- INX20/P. Generator Protection Module.
- ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit.
- ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit.
- ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module.
Worlddidac
Member
ISO 9000: Quality Management
(for Design, Manufacturing,
Commercialization and After-sales service)
European Union Certificate
(total safety)
Page 1
Certificates ISO 14000 and
ECO-Management and Audit Scheme
(environmental management)
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
(Worlddidac Member)
MODULES IN DETAIL
SCADA
SCADA Control System
Generation
Transport/Lines
Transformation
Consumption
TRANS/3A.
Step-up Transformer
EGMG/P. Generation Group
AE1.
Transmission Lines Simulation Unit
AE11.
Energy Consumption Module
TRANS/3B.
Step-down Transformer
AVR/P. Automatic Voltage Regulator
VVCA/MP. AC Motors Speed Controller
Control and Protections
Busbars
-ALI01.
-INX20/P.
-IND05.
-BUS01.
Power Supply.
Generator Protection Module.
Synchronims Module.
Busbar model 1 (Generation).
-BUS02.
-BUS05.
-BUS03.
-BUS04.
Busbar model 2 (Transport).
Busbar model 5 (Transport).
Busbar model 3 (Coupling).
Busbar model 4 (Consumption).
ERP-PGC. Generators Protection and Control Device Unit
ERP-PD. Distance Protection Relay Unit
ERP-PDF. Differential Protection Relay Unit
Faults
ERP-MF. Fault Injection Module
Page 2
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System
SPECIFICATIONS
SCADA is an industry-standard supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) software for realistic experience of power system control.
For use with MPSSC Simulator to increase students´ understanding of power systems.
It can connect to multiple generation systems for remote control and supervision of local generation and distributed generation.
It includes alarms and logs data for detailed analysis of MPSSC during stable and transient operation.
It communicates with programmable logic controllers (PLCs), numerical protection relays, automatic voltage regulators and prime-mover
simulation device of the Power System Simulator to control and collect information from the power system.
Includes high performance computer with integrated communication interface to exchange information with all devices.
Remotely controls the generator and prime-mover of the MPSSC Simulator in different power system operation control methods (frequency
control, voltage control, active power control, reactive power control, power factor control, generators load exchange).
The SCADA connects to MPSSC to train students in supervision and control of power systems.
The package includes industrial-standard SCADA software, a computer, colour printer and communications hardware.
EDIBON supplies the software already installed on the computer. The software does several jobs, including remote control and data display and
logging. It includes programs written by EDIBON to match experiments which students have done directly with the MPSSC Simulator. The
software´s on-screen display or ´user interface´shows real-time data and mimics the circuit-breakers (opening and closing). It also mimics the
adjustment of the loads and any faults applied by the user. Other screens give details about the settings and data collected at each protection relay
or instrument on the simulator.
Students select the correct screen for the experiment they want to perform. They then use the computer to close circuit-breakers, set and adjust any
loads and connect the grid supply (or start the generator) by mean of touch screens, in others words, they configure the topology of the Simulator.
The generators synchronization can be performed in manual and automatic mode with the help of SCADA.
Students can use the software to log data from the simulator and analyse it, compare conditions before and after faults, and see the effects of
faults. They can use this information to predict power system problems and change the power system protection to prevent future problems.
The software includes the experiments already given with the MPSSC Simulator.
contiue...
Page 3
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS
The experiments include:
- Generator characteristics and performance.
- Transformers.
- Transmission, distribution and consumption.
- Power system protection.
- Power system operation and control in different modes.
- Power flow control.
- etc.
SCADA allows the control and supervision of the operations related to the generation, transformation, transmission and distribution of the
electrical energy made by the MPSSC Simulator.
Through a sophisticated human-machine interface, executed in a computer, it is possible to monitor and control a lot of events and alarms as well
as analyse, display and control the information acquired from all Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVRs),
protection relays and prime mover simulation device.
SCADA system is connected to the PLCs communication networks, protection relays and the rest of the units of the MPSSC Simulator, allowing the
data acquisition and control in real time from all the elements of the MPSSC Simulator. The acquired data are stored for their future analysis or
they are directly sent to screens connected to the computer as a visual information.
The objective of the SCADA developed architecture is centralising and automating all the control tasks, monitoring, protection and data
acquisition of the MPSSC Simulator is operated similar to local or central load dispatch center of Real Electrical Power System.
The equipments connected to the SCADA I make one or some of the following functions:
1.-
Respond to the commands of the control computer, in order to close or open all the circuit breaker contacts, power isolator and the rest
of the equipments that conform the topology of the Power System Simulator.
2.-
Transmit to SCADA the ON/OFF state of the electrical equipment that conform the Simulated Electrical Power System.
3.-
Vary all the set points of the controlled parameters, for example, the frequency control, active power, reactive power, power factor and
voltage control set point.
4.-
Measurement and management of all the acquired electrical parameters in different nodes and points of the simulated power system.
5.-
Protection of the electrical circuits and the equipments that conform the MPSSC Simulator.
SCADA allows making a control, supervision and data acquisition in a centralised and remote way, simulating a central generation dispatch
center.
With help of SCADA, students can observe the real time state of the electrical equipment of the MPSSC by means of graphical and state screens.
With SCADA, the operator of the electrical power system can monitor its state and consequently, it can act and make decisions about how to
operate in different conditions. For example, when there is a sound or visual alarm, the operator can see what is happening in a SCADA screen,
because the monitoring system includes an alarm sequences and events list of all the equipment operation, recordered throughout the practice
period and can done, reports about a determined operation or about the complete practice.
Another SCADA facility is that it allows visualise in a central way all the instrumentation of the MPSSC. Simulator through several screens with
digital and analogical virtual instruments.
In the MPSSC. Simulator, several multifunctional and numeric protection relays are used, because the study of the electrical protections is an
essential point for a electrical power system.
The protection relays include measurement, communication and programmable logic possibilities to done functions of monitories and control of
the equipment that are protecting. Thanks to these facilities, the protection functions are incorporated and managed from SCADA, making the
teaching of this subject easier in a automated and centralised way, because the students can communicate with each protection relay and
managed it remotely.
Page 4
www.edibon.com
SCADA Control System (continuation)
Examples of some possibilities
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Higher Education Telecommunications Laboratory
(3HE)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 2
0100. Physics
0110: 3D Physics Basic Module
0200. Electronics
0230: Transducers and Sensors Module
0240: Control Electronics Module
0250: Digital Electronics Module
0270: Microprocessors Module
0200/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Electronics & Physics
Ref.:3HE-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
3D PHYSICS. BASIC MODULE
Ref: 0110
1 / 2
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
EFAC
FUB
EFAC/CIB
DAB
FCE
FCM
FM
FAC
FOP
FTT
DESCRIPTION
THREE DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D),
FORMED BY:
BASE STRUCTURE AND ROBOT FOR THREE
DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR THREE DIMENSIONS
PHYSICS SYSTEM (3D)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
SET FOR ELECTRICAL FIELDS (3D) APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SET FOR MAGNETIC FIELDS (3D APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SET FOR MECHANICS STUDY (3D) APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SET FOR ACOUSTICS STUDY(3D) APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SET FOR OPTICS STUDY (3D) APPLICATION,
FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS + COMPUTER
CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
SET FOR THERMODYNAMICS STUDY (3D)
APPLICATION, FORMED BY: SENSORS + ELEMENTS
+ COMPUTER CONTROL, DATA ACQUISITION AND
DATA MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
EFAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THREE
DIMENSIONS PHYSICS SYSTEM (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS) FOR THE
APPLICATIONS: FCE-ELECTRICAL, FCM-MAGNETIC,
FM-MECHANICS, FAC-ACOUSTIC, FOP-OPTICS, FTTTHEMODYNAMICS & FMF-FLUDS MECHANICS
1
3
18ST-PENT
COMPUTER (LAST VERSION)
1
4
WR/6
NORMAL PROJECTOR
1
5
0110PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0110PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0110IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0110CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0110TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0110MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0110
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Computer Controlled Three Dimensions (3D)
Physics System
EFAC
Technical Teaching Equipment
Teaching
Technique
used
3D. EDIBON Three
Dimensions System
Sensor
allocation
1 FUB. Base structure
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
2
Control
Interface Box
and Robot
Ele
allocments
ation
Computer
*
( )
Computer Control
Software of each
application
(not included
in the supply)
MORE THAN
100
6 Manuals
PRACTICAL
EXERCISES
4 Sets (sensor+elements+computer control software) required for each application:
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Elements
Elements
Elements
Computer Control
Software for Electrical
Fields application (*)
Computer Control
Software for Magnetic
Fields application (*)
+
4.1 FCE.
Set for Electrical
Fields application
4.2 FCM.
Sensor
Elements
Elements
Computer Control
Software for Acoustics
Study application (*)
Computer Control
Software for Optics
Study application (*)
+
+
+
Set for Magnetic
Fields application
4.3 FM.
Set for Mechanics
Study application
+
+
Elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Mechanics
Study application (*)
Sensor
Sensor
+
+
+
4.4 FAC.
Set for Acoustics
Study application
+
+
4.5
FOP. Set for Optics
Study application
Computer Control
Software for
Thermodynamics Study
application (*)
4.6
FTT. Set for
Thermodynamics
Study application
Unitary Process Configuration
elements
of each
application
Sensor
moving
in the space
Base Structure
and Robot
Control
Interface
Box
Cable to
computer
Some 3D Results
ISO:9001-2000 Quality Certificate
www.edibon.com
Dimensions System
Worlddidac Quality Charter
Certificate
Page 5
Data acquisition
board
OPEN CONTROL
+
REAL TIME CONTROL
3D. EDIBON Three
Cable to
Control
Interface
Box
Computer Control
Software of each
application
Products
Products range
Units
1.-Physics
Student
post
SPECIFICATIONS
Common items for all applications
1 FUB. Base structure and Robot:
This unit is common for all applications type “F”and can work with one or several applications.
Anodized aluminium structure. Metallic elements in steel.
Cartesian robot, controlled by 3 motors.
Movement in the X, Y and Z axes.
Support for the different sensors.
Robot arm with a sweeping area .
Electronic box for the motors multiplexing. This Electronic box is controlled by a PLC allocated into
the Control Interface Box.
Wires.
FUB. Base structure
and Robot
2 EFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box:
This unit is common for all applications type “F”and can work with one or several applications.
Control interface box with process diagram in the front panel and with the same distribution that the
different elements located in the unit, for an easy understanding by the student.
All sensors, with its respective signals, are properly manipulated for -10 to +10V computer output.
Sensors connectors in the interface have different pines numbers (from 2 to 16), to avoid connection
errors. Single cable between the control interface box and computer.
The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled, without need of changes or connections
during the whole process test procedure.
Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences.
Conventional mechanical and electrical protection systems, and also, computer protection and in a
simultaneous way.
EFAC/CIB
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Max. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s (Kilo samples per second).
Input range (V)= ± 10V.
Data transfers=DMA, interrupts, programmed I/0.
Number of DMA channels=6.
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Maximum output rate up to: 833 KS/s.
DAB
Output range(V)=± 10.
Data transfers=DMA, interrupts, programmed I/0.
Digital Input/Output:
Number of channels=24 inputs/outputs.
D0 or DI Sample Clock frequency: 0 to 1 MHz.
Timing:
Counter/timers=2.
Resolution:
Counter/timers: 32 bits.
Continue...
Page 6
www.edibon.com
SPECIFICATIONS
Applications
4 Sets required for each application:
We offer some Sets of components for doing the main exercises and practices, but THE UNIT IS OPEN to use many other
elements that can be chosen by the teacher.
4.1
FCE. Set for Electrical Fields application:
This application can be done by using just the following:
-Common items for all applications:
1) FUB. Base structure and Robot.
2) EFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box.
3) DAB. Data Acquisition Board.
-Set for this particular application, including these items:
a) Sensor:
Sensor of Electric Field. It is a probe capable of measuring the potential created by any distribution of loads. It
consists on a conductor wire that measures the reference and the point where it is located.
b) Elements:
A nickel-plated conductor sphere with diameter of 100 mm.
Conductor coil sheets of 280 x 240 mm (2 units).
Conductor coil sheets of 100 x 280 mm (2 units).
A nickel-plated sphere with insulating rod.
Several conductor plates.
Tank.
Red conductor cable with banana crocodile.
Black conductor cable with banana crocodile.
Black cables (2 units) with bananas at the ends.
Red cables (2 units) with bananas at the ends.
The teacher can use any element that creates ELECTRICAL FIELDS, so the UNIT IS OPEN and can do
MANY OTHER EXPERIMENTS.
c) Computer Control Software:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Electrical Fields application.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Graphic and intuitive simulation of the process in screen.
Compatible with the industry standards.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way.
Flexible and open software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process
parameters.
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
Student calibration system for all sensors involved in the process.
It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. Comparative analysis
of the obtained data, after the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
Open software, allowing to the teacher to modify texts, instructions. Teacher’s and student’s passwords to facilitate
the teacher’s control on the student, and allowing the access at different work levels.
This unit allows that the 30 students of the classroom can visualize simultaneously all results and
manipulation of the unit, during the process, by using a projector.
4.2
Sensor
+
Elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Electrical
Fields application
FCE
FCM. Set for Magnetic Fields application:
This application can be done by using just the following:
-Common items for all applications:
1) FUB. Base structure and Robot.
2) EFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box.
3) DAB. Data Acquisition Board.
-Set for this particular application, including these items:
a) Sensor:
Hall probe capable of measuring the intensity of the static and dynamic magnetic fields.
b) Elements:
Two magnets of AlNiCo.
100 gr. of iron powder.
Isolated conductor wires (l=200 mm, diam.=5 mm).
Red and black testing wires.
Working table.
Conductor spirals of different diameters.
Electromagnets and cooper wires.
The teacher can use any element that creates MAGNETIC FIELDS, so the UNIT IS OPEN and can do MANY
OTHER EXPERIMENTS.
c) Computer Control Software:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Magnetic Fields application.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Graphic and intuitive simulation of the process in screen.
Compatible with the industry standards.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way.
Flexible and open software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process
parameters.
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
Student calibration system for all sensors involved in the process.
It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. Comparative analysis
of the obtained data, after the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
Open software, allowing to the teacher to modify texts, instructions. Teacher’s and student’s passwords to facilitate
the teacher’s control on the student, and allowing the access at different work levels.
This unit allows that the 30 students of the classroom can visualize simultaneously all results and
manipulation of the unit, during the process, by using a projector.
Sensor
+
Elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Magnetic
Fields application
FCM
Continue...
Page 7
SPECIFICATIONS
Applications (continuation)
4.3
FM. Set for Mechanics Study application:
This application can be done by using just the following:
-Common items for all applications:
1) FUB. Base structure and Robot.
2) EFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box.
3) DAB. Data Acquisition Board.
-Set for this particular application, including these items:
a) Sensor:
3 Ultrasonic receivers of 40kHz.
3 Ultrasonic emitters of 40kHz.
b) Elements:
Receiver supports.
Bodies for studying the kinematics and dynamics as:
Weights and Car model.
The teacher can use any element suitable for MECHANICS study, so the UNIT IS OPEN and can do MANY
OTHER EXPERIMENTS.
c) Computer Control Software:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Mechanics Study application.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Graphic and intuitive simulation of the process in screen.
Compatible with the industry standards.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way.
Flexible and open software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process
parameters.
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
Student calibration system for all sensors involved in the process.
It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. Comparative analysis
of the obtained data, after the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
Open software, allowing to the teacher to modify texts, instructions. Teacher’s and student’s passwords to facilitate
the teacher’s control on the student, and allowing the access at different work levels.
This unit allows that the 30 students of the classroom can visualize simultaneously all results and
manipulation of the unit, during the process, by using a projector.
4.4
Sensor
+
Elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Mechanics
Study application
FM
FAC. Set for Acoustics Study application:
This application can be done by using just the following:
-Common items for all applications:
1) FUB. Base structure and Robot.
2) EFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box.
3) DAB. Data Acquisition Board.
-Set for this particular application, including these items:
a) Sensor:
An acoustic sensor (microphone) of high sensitivity.
b) Elements:
3 Acoustic sources (trumpets):
Two of them are of low frequency 450Hz, 90dB and the third one of high frequency 4500Hz and 90dB, with
supply of 12V. AC.
Anacoic camera with walls covered with polyurethane of high intensity. It will allow you to isolate your experiments
from external noises, allowing you to obtain the waves produced by the sound source supplied.
Microphone of high sensitivity.
Flat wall covered with high density polyurethane and orifice of 10 mm.
Inclined wall and 45º with possibility of being recovered with foam of high density.
Buzzer.
The teacher can use any element suitable for ACOUSTICS study, so the UNIT IS OPEN and can do MANY
OTHER EXPERIMENTS.
c) Computer Control Software:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Acoustics Study application.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Graphic and intuitive simulation of the process in screen.
Compatible with the industry standards.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way.
Flexible and open software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process
parameters.
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
Student calibration system for all sensors involved in the process.
It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. Comparative analysis of the
obtained data, after the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
Open software, allowing to the teacher to modify texts, instructions. Teacher’s and student’s passwords to facilitate
the teacher’s control on the student, and allowing the access at different work levels.
This unit allows that the 30 students of the classroom can visualize simultaneously all results and
manipulation of the unit, during the process, by using a projector.
Sensor
+
Elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Acoustics
Study application
FAC
Continue...
Page 8
www.edibon.com
SPECIFICATIONS
Applications (continuation)
4.5
FOP. Set for Optics Study application:
This application can be done by using just the following:
-Common items for all applications:
1) FUB. Base structure and Robot.
2) EFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box.
3) DAB. Data Acquisition Board.
-Set for this particular application, including these items:
a) Sensor:
Optics study sensor consists of diode capable of measuring the light.
b) Elements:
Modulated laser diode:
Nominal wavelength=670 nm.
Maximum power output= 1 mW.
2 Lens of crystal. One has x9 magnification and 31 mm of focus distance, and the other has x2 magnification.
Line generator. The line generator is a combination system consisting of a lens to focus or collimate the beam from a
laser diode and cylindrical lens, which generated the line. By rotating the front cell assembly, the beam can be
focussed or collimated. A locking ring is used to secure the final position.
Magnifier.
Angle measurer.
The teacher can use any element suitable for OPTICS study, so the UNIT IS OPEN and can do MANY
OTHER EXPERIMENTS.
c) Computer Control Software:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Optics Study application.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Graphic and intuitive simulation of the process in screen.
Compatible with the industry standards.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way.
Flexible and open software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process
parameters.
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
Student calibration system for all sensors involved in the process.
It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. Comparative analysis
of the obtained data, after the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
Open software, allowing to the teacher to modify texts, instructions. Teacher’s and student’s passwords to facilitate
the teacher’s control on the student, and allowing the access at different work levels.
This unit allows that the 30 students of the classroom can visualize simultaneously all results and
manipulation of the unit, during the process, by using a projector.
4.6
Sensor
+
Elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Optics
Study application
FOP
FTT. Set for Thermodynamics Study application:
This application can be done by using just the following:
-Common items for all applications:
1) FUB. Base structure and Robot.
2) EFAC/CIB. Control Interface Box.
3) DAB. Data Acquisition Board.
-Set for this particular application, including these items:
a) Sensor:
Thermodynamics study sensor consists of a probe capable of measuring the temperature along the interchangeable
elements or in the space (Aluminium, Cooper and Stainless Steel).
b) Elements:
Heater element: Electrical resistance of 50W.
Heat sink: Blade metallic plus fan.
The teacher can use any element suitable for THERMODYNAMICS study, so the UNIT IS OPEN and can do
MANY OTHER EXPERIMENTS.
c) Computer Control Software:
Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software for Thermodynamics Study application.
Compatible with the industry standards.
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way.
Flexible and open software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all process
parameters.
Management, processing, comparison and storage of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
Student calibration system for all sensors involved in the process.
It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time. Comparative analysis
of the obtained data, after the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
Open software, allowing to the teacher to modify texts, instructions. Teacher’s and student’s passwords to facilitate
the teacher’s control on the student, and allowing the access at different work levels.
This unit allows that the 30 students of the classroom can visualize simultaneously all results and
manipulation of the unit, during the process, by using a projector.
5 Cables and Accessories.
6 Manuals:
This system is supplied with 8 manuals for each application: Required Services, Assembly and Installation,
Interface and Control Software, Starting-up, Safety, Maintenance, Calibration & Practices Manuals.
Page 9
Sensor
+
Elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Thermodynamics Study
application
FTT
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Software Main Screens
Example: FCM. Magnetic Fields Application
Main screen
Control Type Menu.
It this menu we can see several selectionable parts, that are shown in the following screens:
Force Mode screen.
We click on ” Start” to start
the force movement of any
axis.
We can activate each axis
and indicate the movement
direction of each axis
respectively.
Continue...
Page 10
www.edibon.com
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Software Main Screens (continuation)
Move to Point screen.
In this mode we can move the robot
to a particular point, introducing
the coordinate in the x, y, z controls.
Sweeping Mode screen.
We activate this mode selecting “Scanning
Robot”. In this mode, a plane sweeping,
defined by 3 coordinates, will be executed.
Result Graph screen.
In this mode we can see the graphic
representation in 3D of obtained data.
Continue...
Page 11
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Software Main Screens (continuation)
Controls to position
the robot to origin
Robot Configuration
Mode screen.
Reset Robot Control
Serial Port Control
Configuration
In several modes, we can see a indication bar in the middle of the screen. This bar has several indicators:
1) Actual robot position indicator, shown in millimeters.
2) Magnetic field indicator in actual robot position.
3) Led indicator for limit switch of the corresponding axis. Led indicator for data taking. (The robot indicates to the software when it has to take
a right data). Led indicator for busy robot.
Indication bar
Actual Robot
position
Indicators:
-Limit switch.
-Data taking.
-Busy robot.
Magnetic Field in
Gauss in actual
position
Continue...
Page 12
www.edibon.com
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Software Main Screens (continuation)
Calibration screens
This unit allows that the 30 students of the classroom can visualize simultaneously
all results and manipulation of the unit, during the process, by using a projector.
Page 13
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Some typical results
(in two and three dimensions)
Magnetic Fields
Continue...
Page 14
www.edibon.com
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Some typical results
(in two and three dimensions)
Magnetic Fields (continuation)
Continue...
Page 15
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Some typical results
(in two and three dimensions)
Electric Fields
Acoustics Study
Continue...
Page 16
www.edibon.com
3D (EDIBON Three Dimensions System)
Some typical results
(in two and three dimensions)
Mechanics Study
Optics Study
Thermodynamics Study
Page 17
EXERCISES AND PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Practical Possibilities of the system:
Practices to be done with the Electrical Fields application:
Level 0:
1.- Programming and applications of a robot arm.
Level I:
2.- Visualization of the created fields lines by a punctual load.
3.- Spatial representation of the equipotential lines and the intensity of the
electric field created by a punctual load.
4.- Visualization of the field lines generated by two punctual loads.
5.- Spatial representation of the equipotential curves created by two spherical
loads.
6.- Study of the electric field created by a plane and a spherical conductor, both
of them loaded. Principle of Superimposition (I).
7.- Spatial representation of the lines of field created by a conductor wire.
8.- Study of the superimposition of the fields created by two conductor wires.
9.- Visualization of the lines of field generated by two conductor planes
according to the distance of separation. Study of the effect of Edge.
10.-Study of the confinement of loads in a plane-parallel condenser according
to the distance.
11.-Calculation of the load contained by a plane-parallel condenser. Theorem
of Gauss (I).
Level II:
All those of Level I.
12.-Experimental demonstration of the law of Gauss for a sphere and two plane
conductors.
13.-Study of the load stored in a plane-parallel condenser according to the
distance between the badges. Concept of capacity.
14.-Experimental study of the effect of edge.
15.-Experimental demonstration of the Theorem of Ampère.
16.-Spatial representation of the equipotential lines created by a cylinder and a
plane conductor. Principle of Superimposition (II).
17.-Spatial study of the electric field created by a non-regular body. Effects of
edges.
18.-Visualization and calculation of the intensity of the electric field generated
by a plane-parallel condenser with a dielectric sphere inside. Dielectric (I).
Level III:
All those of level I and II.
19.-Shielding of the electric field by a conductor. Cells of Faraday.
20.-Spatial representation of the electric field and the equipotential lines
generated when introducing a spherical conductor in a plane-parallel
condenser. Principle of superimposition (III).
21.-Lines of electric field and equipotential surfaces generated by two spherical
conductors equidistant to a plane conductor. Image effect.
22.-Equipotential lines and electric field generated by a quadrupole. Study of
the energy of the system. Configuration of the minimum energy. Effects of
polarization.
23.-Experimental calculation of the redistribution of load and potential energy
of a series and parallel configuration of two plane-parallel condensers.
IMPORTANT: The teacher can use his own elements, so these practical
possibilities are NEARLY UNLIMITED.
Practices to be done with the Magnetic Fields application:
Level 0:
24.-Programming and applications of a robot arm.
Level I:
25.-Visualization of the lines of magnetic field generated by a magnet.
26.-Line of the magnetic field.
27.-Three-dimensional representation of the magnetic field generated by a
magnet.
28.-Magnetic field generated by two magnets. Spatial representation of the
field lines and intensity.
29.-Three-dimension study of the generated magnetic field by a thin conductor
wire. Experimental verification of the law of Biot-Savart.
30.-Sources of the magnetic field.
31.-Magnetic field generated by a spiral. Three-dimensional representation of
the intensity and visualization of the field lines.
Level II:
All those of level I.
32.-Experimental demonstration of the existence of sources and drains.
Gauss’s theorem.
33.-Calculation of the current which floes by a conductor wire. Ampère's
law (I).
34.-Magnetic field generated by two lines of parallel currents. Visualization of
field lines and calculation of the magnetic intensity. Principle of
superimposition (I).
35.-Helzmholtz coils. Three-dimensional study of the magnetic field.
36.-Magnetic field generated by two spires by which currents in the same direction
and in opposite direction flow.Principle of superimposition (III).
37.-Magnetic field generated by a solenoid of an spires. Law of Ampère (II).
38.-Study of the magnetic field in function of the frequency of the current that
circulates through the wire. Law of Biot-Savart (II).
Level III:
All those of level II.
39.-Magnetic field generated by a real coil.
40.-Magnetic field in the material.
41.-Spatial representation of the magnetic field of a coil with a ferromagnetic
nucleus.
42.-Determination of the magnetic sensitivity of a paramagnetic material.
43.-Effect of a diamagnetic nucleus in the magnetic field generated by a
solenoid.
44.-Magnetic induction. Calculation of the e.m.f. induced in a solenoid.
45.-Experimental calculation of the coefficient of magnetic self-induction of a
solenoid.
46.-Experimental calculation of the coefficient of induction of two solenoids.
IMPORTANT: The teacher can use his own elements, so these practical
possibilities are NEARLY UNLIMITED.
Practices to be done with the Mechanics Study application:
47.- Programming and applications of a robot arm.
Study in one dimension:
48.-Calibration of the receivers.
49.-Average velocity concept.
50.-Definition of instantaneously velocity.
51.-Acceleration concept.
Study in two and three dimensions:
52.-Velocity as a vector. Average velocity concept.
53.-Acceleration as a vector.
54.-Movement of the projectiles.
55.-Circular movement.
56.-Energetic conservation.
IMPORTANT: The teacher can use his own elements, so these practical
possibilities are NEARLY UNLIMITED.
Practices to be done with the Acoustics Study application:
Level 0:
57.- Programming and applications of a robot arm.
Level I:
58.-Temporal visualization of an acoustic wave.
59.-Experimental determination of the vibration frequency of a wave.
60.-Experimental calculation of the speed of an acoustic wave.
61.-Dependence of the propagation speed of a wave with the temperature.
62.-Three-dimensional study of an acoustic wave.
63.-Signal generated by two identical sources (Interference I).
64.-Acoustic attenuation produced by an obstacle.
65.-Generator of waves fronts (Diffraction II).
Level II:
All those of level I.
66.-Experimental determination of the power of an acoustic transmitter.
67.-Spatial representation of an acoustic attenuation.
68.-Space-time study of the signal generated by two acoustic sources
(Interference II).
69.-Acoustic medium.
Level III:
All those of levels I and II.
70.-Effects in the acoustic shield of the wave frequency.
71.-Effects in the acoustic shield of the wave width.
72.-Reflection processes of an acoustic signal. Reflected energy.
73.-Concave and convex mirrors. Space-time representation.
74.-Refraction processes of an acoustic wave. Transmitted energy.
75.-Effects of the wavelength in the diffraction phenomenon (Diffraction III).
IMPORTANT: The teacher can use his own elements, so these practical
possibilities are NEARLY UNLIMITED.
Practices to be done with the Optics Study application:
76.- Programming and applications of a robot arm.
77.- Calibration of the optics sensors.
78.- Reflection principles.
79.- Determination of the index of the refraction (n).
80.- Refraction principles.
81.- Determination of the reflection index for the methacrylate.
82.- Study of the dispersion.
83.- Calculation of the focal distance of a spherical mirror.
84.- Determination of the focal length in a magnifier (I).
85.- Determination of the focal length in a magnifier (II).
86.- Determination of the focal length for two lens.
87.- Determination of the aberration of a len.
88.- Interference.
IMPORTANT: The teacher can use his own elements, so these practical
possibilities are NEARLY UNLIMITED.
Practices to be done with the Thermodynamics Study application:
89.- Programming and applications of a robot arm.
Laboratory practices in one dimension:
90.- Calibration of the temperature sensors.
91.- Conduction in one dimension.
92.- Determination of the thermal conductivity “k”.
93.- Conduction through a compound bar.
94.- Determination of the thermal conductivity, k, of the stainless steel.
95.- Determination of the thermal contact resistance Rtc.
96.- Insulation effect.
Laboratory practices.
97.- Introduction.
98.- Temperature distribution on two-dimensional system.
99.- Determination of the thermal conductivity in two-dimensional system.
100.- Heat flow in a two-dimensional system.
IMPORTANT: The teacher can use his own elements, so these practical
possibilities are NEARLY UNLIMITED.
Page 18
www.edibon.com
POSSIBILITIES OF OTHER AVAILABLE EXPANSIONS
Expansion 1:
7
Mini ESN. Multipost EDIBON
Mini Scada-Net System
Teaching
Technique
used
1 UNIT =
30 STUDENTS can
work simultaneously
Sensor
+
Elements
+
Base structure and Robot
Computer Control
Software for Electrical
Fields application
Control
interface
box
6 available
applications
Mini Scada-Net
Software
Teacher’s
Central
30 Student Computer
Post
LOCAL NET
OPEN CONTROL
+
MULTICONTROL
+
MULTI STUDENT POST
Note: The Mini-ESN
system can be used
with any computer
controlled unit.
ORDER INFORMATION
Items supplied as standard
Complementary items to the standard supply
Minimum configuration for normal operation includes:
Common items for all applications:
1 FUB. Base Structure and Robot. Common for all applications type
“ F ” and can work with one or several applications.
2 EFAC/CIB.Control Interface Box. Common for all applications
type “ F ” and can work with one or several applications.
3 DAB.Data Acquisition Board. Common for all applications type “F”.
Expansions
7
Mini ESN. Multipost EDIBON Mini-Scada Net System.
Applications:
4 Sets (sensor+elements+computer control software) required for each
application:
4.1 FCE. Set for Electrical Fields application, AND/OR
4.2
FCM. Set for Magnetic Fields application, AND / OR
4.3 FM. Set for Mechanics Study application, AND / OR
4.4 FAC. Set for Acoustics Study application, AND / OR
4.5 FOP
. Set for Optics Study application, AND / OR
4.6
FTT. Set for Thermodynamics Study application.
5 Cables and Accessories.
6 Manuals.
DIMENSIONS & WEIGHTS
REQUIRED SERVICES
- Electrical supply: single phase,220V/50Hz or 110V/60 Hz.
- Computer (PC).
Base Structure and Robot:
-Dimensions: 1020x1250x890 mm. approx.
-Weight: 80 kg. approx.
Control Interface Box:
-Dimensions: 490x330x310 mm. approx.
-Weight: 10 Kg. approx.
Each set for the different applications:
-Dimensions: 500x300x300 mm. approx.
-Weight: 8 Kg. approx.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/physics/3dphysics/EFAC.pdf
Page 19
issue:01/11
TRANSDUCERS AND SENSORS MODULE
Ref: 0230
1 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
SAIT
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION TRAINER
1
2
SAIT/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION
1
3
SAIT/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TRANSDUCERS AND INSTRUMENTATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
4
BS
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS,
COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
BASIC UNIT WITH COMPUTER CONTROLLED
INTERFACE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY
OF SENSORS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR MODULAR SYSTEM FOR
THE STUDY OF SENSORS
VIBRATIONS AND /OR DEFORMATION MODULE
TEMPERATURE MODULE
PRESSURE MODULE
FLOW MODULE
OVENS MODULE
LIQUID LEVEL MODULE
TACHOMETER MODULE
PROXIMITY MODULE
PNEUMATIC MODULE
LIGHT TEST MODULE
BSPC
DAB
BS/CCSOF
BS-1
BS-2
BS-3
BS-4
BS-5
BS-6
BS-7
BS-8
BS-9
BS-10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
BS/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
MODULAR SYSTEM FOR THE STUDY OF SENSORS
1
6
BS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
STUDY OF SENSORS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS) OF THE MODULES: BS-1 VIBRATIONS,
BS-2 TEMPERATURE, BS-3 PRESSURE, BS-4 FLOW,
BS-5 OVENS, BS-6 LIQUID LEVEL, BS-7
TACHOMETER, BS-8 PROXIMITY & BS-9 PNEUMATIC
1
7
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
8
EDAS/VIS-0.25
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
VIS
9
1
0230PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
10
0230PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
11
0230IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
12
0230CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
13
0230TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
14
0230MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0230
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
(continuation)
SAIT. Transducers and Instrumentation Trainer
Optional:
EDAS/VIS.
EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Data Acquisition Interface Box
Data
Acquisition
Board
Data Acquisition
and Virtual
Instrumentation
Software
SAIT. Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The SAIT trainer shows didactically the function principles
of the transducers most used in industry. It is divided into
two parts: the lower part, in which all the input and output
transducers are found, while in the upper part, the system
of signal conditioning and those of instrumentation are
found; the electrical and pneumatic power supplies are
housed in its interior.
Input Transducers:
Resistance Transducers for applications in angular or
linear position:
Linearly sliding potentiometer. Rotary carbon-track
potentiometer. Rotary coil potentiometer. Precision
servo- potentiometer. The Wheatstone Bridge circuit.
Applications of temperature:
NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
Thermistors. RTD Sensor (Platinum Transducer with
Temperature dependent Resistance). Temperature
sensor IC “Integrated Circuit LM 335”. Type “K”
Thermocouples.
Applications of light:
Photovoltaic Cell. Phototransistor. Photodiode PIN.
Photoconductive Cell.
Linear position and force:
Linear Variable Differential Transformer LVDT.
Extensiometric Transducer.
Environmental measurements:
Air flow Sensor. Air pressure Sensor. Humidity sensor.
Rotational speed and position control:
Slotted optoelectronic Sensor. Opto-reflective
Sensor. Inductive sensor. Hall effect Sensor.
Permanent D.C. magnet tachogenerator.
Sound measurements:
Dynamical microphone. Ultrasonic receiver.
Visualization Devices:
Timing device/ counter with LED display. Graphic bar
visualizer. Mobile coil voltmeter.
Output Transducers:
Electrical Resistance. Incandescent Lamp.
Applications for the sound output:
Buzzing (Buzzer). Mobile coil loud speaker. Ultrasonic
transmitter.
Applications of linear or angular motion:
D.C. Soleinod. D.C. Relay. Solenoid Valve.
Permanent Magnet D.C. Motor.
Signal Conditioners:
D.C. Amplifiers. A.C. Amplifier. Power Amplifier.
Current Amplifier. Buffers. Inverting Amplifier.
Differential amplifier. V/F and F/V Converters. V/I
and I/V Converters. Full Wave Rectifier. Hysteresis
convertible Comparator. Electronic switch. Oscillator
40 kHz. Filter 40 kHz. Time-constant convertible
Low Pass Filter.
Circuit with Mathematical Operation: Adding
amplifier. Integrator with different time constants.
Differentiator with different time constants.
Instrumentation Amplifier. Circuit SAMPLE & HOLD.
Amplifiers with gain control and offset.
Furthermore it contains a linearly mounted system of a
D.C. motor, tachodynamo, reflective, slotted optosensors to detect the absolute and incremental position.
Cables.
Manuals: 8 manuals supplied.
Dimensions (approx.): 400 x 400 x 300 mm.
Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
electronics/transducerssensors/SAIT.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Basic Control Systems description.
Characteristics of the Control System:
2.- Characteristics of an ON/OFF temperature
control System.
3.- Characteristics of an ON/ OFF Lighting System.
4.- Investigation of the Characteristics of a Positional
Control System.
5. - Proportional Control.
6.- Proportional+Integral Control.
7. - Proportional+DerivateControl.
8. - Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
9. - Characteristics of a Speed Control System.
10.- Operation in Open Loop.
11.- Operation in Closed Loop, Proportional Control.
12.- Proportional+Integral Control.
13.- Proportional+Integral+Derivate Control.
Display devices:
14.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a meter of
time.
15.- Application of the Timer/Counter as a simple counter.
16.- Application of the Timer/Counter as rev-counter or
frequency-meter.
17.- Characteristics of an L.E.D. bargraph display unit.
18.- Characteristic of a Mobile Coil Meter.
19.- Comparison of Digital, Bargraph and Mobile Coil
meters.
20.- To widen the voltage index of the B. M. meter.
Variable Resistance transducers in angle or linear
arrangement:
21.- Variation of the Output Voltage for a
Potentiometer used as a Position transducer.
22.- The Buffer as compensator for the effect of the load
on the output voltage of a potentiometer.
23.- Servo potentiometer. Variation of the output
voltage with respect to its position.
24.- Measuring the Resistance using a Wheatstone
Bridge Circuit.
25.- Measuring the Voltage using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method1).
26.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages
smaller than the normal available voltage.
27.- Measuring Voltages using “Null Balance”
Procedures (Method 2).Measuring voltages
greater than the normal voltage.
Transducers for Applications of Temperature
Measurement:
28.- Characteristics of an Integrated Temperature Circuit.
29.- Construction of a Digital Thermometer using the
facilities of the TRANSDUCER TRAINER.
30.- Characteristics of a Platinum Temperature
Dependent Resistance (T.D.R.) Transducer.
31.- T h e N . T. C . ( N e g a t i v e Te m p e r a t u r e
coefficient)Thermistor.
32.- Characteristics of an N.T.C. Thermistor
(Resistance measuring method).
33.- Characteristics of the N.T.C. Thermistor used in an
alarm circuit (double thermistor).
34.- Characteristics of a Type “K” Thermocouple.
Transducers for Light Measuring Applications:
35.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
36.- Characteristics of a photo-transistor.
37.- Luminous intensity detector.
38.-The P.I.N. Photodiode.
39.- Characteristics of a P.I.N. Photodiode.
Page 22
Linear Position transducers.
40.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable Differential
Transformer (LVDT).
41.- Characteristics of a Variable Resistance.
42.- Characteristics of a Strain gauge Transducer.
Transducers for Environmental Measurement
Applications:
43.- Characteristics of a air flow transducer.
44.- Characteristics of a pressure sensor.
45.- Characteristics of a humidity sensor.
Rotational Velocity Transducers or Position Measuring
Applications:
46.- Characteristics of a slotted opto-transducers and its
applications for counting and speed measurement.
47.- Characteristics of the reflective optotransducers
and Gray code disk.
48.- Characteristics of an inductive transducer.
49.- Characteristics of a Hall effect transducer.
50.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent magnet
Tachogenerator.
Transducers for Measuring Sound:
51.- Characteristics of a Dynamic Microphone.
52.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic receiver.
Transducers for Sound Output:
53.- Characteristics of the mobile coil loudspeaker.
54.- Characteristics of a Buzzer.
Output Transducer for Linear or Angular Movement:
55.- Characteristics of a D.C. Solenoid.
56.- Characteristics of a D.C. Relay.
57.- Characteristics of a Solenoid air valve.
58.- Characteristics of a Permanent Magnet Motor.
Signal Conditioning Circuits:
59.- Characteristics of the Direct Current amplifiers 1,
2 and x100.
60.- Characteristics of a current amplifier and
application of a buffer amplifier.
61.- Characteristics of Power and Buffer Amplifiers.
62.- Characteristics of an Inverter Amplifier.
63.- Characteristics of a Differential Amplifier.
Signal Converter Circuits:
64.- Characteristics of a Voltage to Current Converter.
65.- Characteristics of a Current to Voltage Converter.
66.-Characteristics of a Voltage to Frequency
Converter.
67.-Characteristics of a Frequency to Voltage
Converter.
68.- Characteristics of a Full Wave Rectifier.
Comparators, Oscillator and Filters:
69.- Characteristics of a Comparator.
70.- Characteristics of an Alarm Oscillator circuit.
71.- Characteristics of an Electronic Switch.
72.- Characteristics of the Oscillator of 40 kHz.
73.- Characteristics of Filters.
Circuits that carry out Mathematical Operations:
74.- Characteristics of a Adding Amplifier.
75.- Characteristics of an Integrator.
76.- Characteristics of a Differentiator Circuit.
77.- Characteristics of a Sample and Hold Circuit.
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
2
1
Test Modules
Base Units:
2
(common for all test modules type “BS”)
(to be used with Base Units)
Test Modules
(to be used with Base Units)
BS6
BS1
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA.
EDIBON Computer Control System
Base
Unit
BS2
Computer
Data Acquisition
Board
(not included
in the supply)
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
BS7
OR
BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
BS3
BS8
BS4
BS9
BS5
Other modules
“BS” System includes a set of electronic components with a twofold purpose: to control the signal produced by the transducers, and to evaluate and quantify it.
Sensors or transducers are common elements in the state of our technology. Therefore this SYSTEM has been developed to show the basic principles of different types
of sensors and their way of processing signals.
This system consists of:
1 Base Unit, to control the system:
Option 1: BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit, including EDIBON Computer Control System. OR
Option 2: BSUB. Base Unit (non computer controlled).
2 Test Modules:
BS1. Vibration and/or Deformation Test
Module.
BS2. Temperature Test Module.
BS3. Pressure Test Module.
BS4.
BS5.
BS6.
BS7.
Flow Test Module.
Ovens Test Module.
Liquid Level Test Module.
Tachometers Test Module.
BS8. Proximity Test Module.
BS9. Pneumatic Test Module.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 18
(continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
1
Base Units
BSPC. Computer Controlled Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System:
Control Interface integrated in the unit box (BSPC). Data acquisition board to be installed in a computer slot.
Computer Control Software.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BSUB. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Unit to control the system. Common for the different test modules type “BS”. Elements of the unit are included in a stainless steel box. In the
back panel of the box, we can find the outlet and the general switch of the unit for its operation. In the front panel there are two masks with
all type of signal conditioners, and even an analogical voltmeter.
Amplifiers: Several amplifier circuits of DC are included in the Base Unit, but only three are used specifically for the amplifiers applications:
Amplifier 1, Amplifier 2, Amplifier 3. AC amplifier. Power amplifier. Current amplifier. Two buffer amplifiers. Inverter amplifier. Two
circuits of differential amplifiers are supplied.
Signal Converters Circuits: Converter from Voltage to Current. Converter from Current to Voltage. Converter from Voltage to Frequency.
Converter of Frequency to Voltage (F/V). Full-Wave Rectifier. Phase rectifier. Phase shifter. Semiconductor detector of temperature.
Comparators, Generators, Oscillators and Filters: Comparator. Alarm oscillator. Electronic switch. Oscillator. Filters. Integrator. The
differentiator. Circuit “Sample and Hold”. Pulse generator. Pulse Receiver. PID Control. Power Control. Low Frequency Oscillator.
Current generator.
Others:Supply Sources of Direct Current (1A). Power source (4A). 4 Potentiometers of 1K, 5K, 10K and 20K.
Cables and Accessories, for normal operation. It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) = 490x450x470 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
2
Test Modules
BS1.Vibration and/or Deformation Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Test Module has been designed to teach mechanical vibration and
displacement variable measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Extensiometric gauges:
Characteristics: Resistance at 24ºC: 120 W. Gauge factor at 24ºC:
2.120.
Heating resistance and thermocouple:
Resistance to produce temperature variations in the vibrant bar.
Thermocouple type “K”. Temperature range:-50ºC to 350ºC.
LVDT Sensor: Input Voltage range: 10 to 24VDC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x350 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To measure the vibration of a vibrant girder using
extensiometric gauges.
2.- To use a heating resistance to rise the girder temperature
in order to study the effect on the sensors.(Thermocouple
and heating resistance).
3.- To detect the displacement of the BS1 system vibrant
girder using a LVDT sensor.
4.- Effect of temperature variation on an extensiometric
beam.
5.- Effect of deformation on the resistance of a beam.
6.- Measure of the three deformation dimensions or
deformation of spherical or cylindrical systems.
7.- Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) for
measuring displacements.
8.- Analysis of how to compensate the variation of resistance
of a gauge due to temperature variations, using shorted
circuits with compensating gauges.
9.- Linear variable differential transformers (LVDT) as a
weighing system.
10.- Effect on the vibration of a beam with different masses.
BS2.Temperature Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Temperature Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of sensors of temperature as a measure, and its control.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Bimetallic switch sensor: Opening temperature: 50ºC. Closing
Temp.: 30ºC.
Adjustable bimetallic thermostat, with heater resistor:
Temperature range: 0ºC to 30ºC.
Relay AC: Voltage and current (nominal) :250V-10A. 3 sockets.
Switching voltage: 12 V.
Capillary thermostat: Temperature range: 0ºC-90ºC.
Thermocouples: 3 Cromel-Alumel thermocouples type K.
Temperature range: - 50ºC to 250ºC.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x335 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- How to use the Curie effect as application of a high
temperature thermostatic controller.
2.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. To use the bimetallic
thermostat as a temperature control, calculating its
hysteresis.
3.- Adjustable bimetallic thermostat. How we can reduce the
hysteresis by adding a resistor to the heating circuit.
4.- To use the thermostat based on a bimetallic sensor to
control the temperature.
5.- Capillary thermostatic controller.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 19
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.3-Basic
Transducers
and Sensors
2.1Electronics
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.3- Transducers and Sensors
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
2
BS3.Pressure Test Module
(continuation)
Test Modules (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Pressure Test Module has been designed to teach the use and
applications of this kind of sensors measurement systems. It shows the
different pressure measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Linear positioning sensor (Potentiometer).
Resistor range: 500 W to 5 KW. Operation force: 200-750g.
LVDT sensor: Sensibility: 780mV/mm. Power voltage: 10 to 24Vdc.
Differential pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 to 30 psi.
Sensibility: 3.33mV/psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.
Extensiometric gauges: Nominal resistor @ 25ºC: 120 W. Gauge
factor: 2.00 to 2.1 typical.
Manometric pressure sensor: Measurement range: 0 a 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Absolute pressure sensor: Measurement range: 2 to 30 psi.
Overpressure: 60 psi.
Air Compressor: Air flow: 10 l /min. Pressure: 1.83Kg/cm2. Power
supply: 220V, 50/60Hz.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the Test
Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x320 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Use of linear positioning sensor (potentiometer) to detect
the displacement produced by a diaphragm expansion
caused by the air pressure.
2.- Use of a LVDT as an element to measure the diaphragm
distortion that is consequence of the pressure inside the
pressure chamber.
3.- Differential pressure sensor with hole-board system. Use
of a differential pressure sensor of the semiconductor
type to measure the pressure fall in a hole-board system.
4.- Extensiometric Gauges. To detect objects using an
infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
5.- Measure the pressure in the chamber, using two different
types of sensors (manometric and absolute pressure
sensor).
6.- Extensiometric gauges for measuring deformations: their
resistance changes as the diaphragm expands due to the
pressure coming from the pressure container.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS4.Flow Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The objective this module is to show techniques to measure
changeable fluids.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Flow optical sensor:
Power supply: 4.5 to 24 Vdc. Standard flow range: 0.5 to 5 GPM.
High resolution optical flow sensor: Measurement range: 0.25 to 6.5
l/min.
Underwater pump.
Level sensor by pressure: It is a differential pressure sensor. Pressure
range: 0 to 1psi. Overpressure: 20psi.
Differential pressure sensor (Hole board system): Measurement
range: 0 to 30 psi. Overpressure: 60 psi.
Changeable flow meter: Range:0 -2 l/min.
V narrowing.
Main and secondary tanks.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of
the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x280x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To measure the water volume produced by an
underwater pump in the module using an optical flow
sensor.
2.- To use a high-resolution optical flow sensor to measure
low volumes.
3.- Level sensor by pressure. To use a differential pressure
sensor to measure the liquid level in one of the tanks.
4.- Differential pressure sensor. To measure the pressure-fall
in the module hole board system, as a necessary
parameter to determine volume.
5.- To measure the flow volume generated by the underwater
pump using a flow meter of changeable area.
6.- To obtain the flow-volume value in the secondary tank
using the V narrowing weir.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS5.Ovens Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
With “BS5” Test Module it is possible to study temperature
measurement techniques using several kinds of sensors placed
inside the sealed place that is used as oven.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Oven chamber.
Heating resistance: Maximum dissipation power of 500W.
Fan: Maximum power: 0.96 W. Maximum air flow: 2.5 l/s.
Thermocouples:
4 thermocouples placed inside the oven, each one of them at a
different height. Temperature range: -184 ºC to 400 ºC.
Platinum resistance thermometer:
Temperature range: -70ºC to 600ºC.
Thermistor:
NTC thermistor. Resistence at 25ºC: 5.8 KW. Temperature
range: -40ºC to 125ºC.
Semiconductor temperature sensor: Reverse polarized diode.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with
power supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel
of the Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 405x300x470 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 20
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Heating resistance. Raise the oven internal temperature
over the environmental temperature using a heating
resistance to make tests and practices related with
temperature measurement.
2.- To use a fan as refrigerating element of the oven.
3.- To use thermocouples as temperature sensors elements
inside the oven. Temperature measurement using a
thermocouple.
4.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a platinum
resistance thermometer.
5.- To measure temperature inside the oven using a
thermistor temperature sensor.
6.- Temperature measurement using a thermistor, based on
its negative temperature coefficient.
7.- To obtain the temperature value inside the oven, using a
semiconductor sensor (diode).
8.- PID control.
(continuation)
BS. Modular System for the Study of Sensors:
(continuation)
2
BS6.Liquid Level Test Module
Test Modules (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Liquid Level Test Module “BS6” has been designed to teach the
use and applications of level sensors and their measurement systems.
This module teaches techniques to measure and control the liquid
level in a tank.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Water tanks. 2 Minipumps: Power supply: 12Vdc (max. voltage).
Nominal current: 1 A DC.
Capacitative level sensor. Pressure level sensor, pressure range: 01psi. Level gauge changeable resistance with path end and beginning
switches. Conduction sensor. Magnetic float level sensor. Optical level
sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x300x400 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To use a capacitative sensor to measure the liquid level in
the tank.
2.- To use the differential pressure sensor as an element to
determine the water level in a tank.
3.- To use a changeable resistance fixed to a float system as a
liquid level measurement element.
4.- Conduction Sensor. Use of a sensor made up of to steel
electrodes to measure the water level of a tank.
5.- Magnetic float level sensor. Detect a precise tank liquid
level with a magnetic switch sensor.
6.- Control the BS6 system left tank liquid level using an
optical level sensor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS7.Tachometers Test Module
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This module has been designed to teach linear and angular speed
measurement techniques.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Inductive Sensor: output voltage:
DC Motor: nominal voltage: 12V., resistance: 9,7 Oh., max. vacuum
speed: 8500 r.p.m., max. load speed: approx. 3500 r.p.m., start
voltage: 210mV. DC Tachometer.
Refractive Infrared Sensor. Hall Effect position sensor.
Slot Sensor: Slotted optical switch where an input LED and an output
phototransistor are capsulated.
Encoder.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 300x200x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- DC Motor. Provide the group of sensors of the BS7 system
fixed to the central axle of the equipment with movement
power.
2.- DC Tachometer. To use a DC motor as a tachometer to
measure the revolutions of the BS7 system central axle.
3.- Inductive Sensor.
4.- Refractive Infrared Sensor. To measure the central axle
revolutions of the BS7 system using a light reflection
optical sensor.
5.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a slotted
optical sensor through light interruption.
6.- To obtain the central axle speed value using a Hall-effect
position sensor.
7.- To measure the central axle revolutions of the BS7 system
using the encoder.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS8.Proximity Test Module
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Module has been designed to teach techniques to detect the
proximity of objects, focusing on the distance at which each sensor is
able to detect the object and the type of material it can detect.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
DC Motor: Nominal power supply: 12Vdc.
Proximity capacitative sensor, detection distance: 10 mm.
Hall effect sensor.
Infrared sensor by reflection: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Transmission infrared sensor: Emission narrow beam GaAs IR Emitter.
Detection narrow beam IR Photodetector.
Conduction sensor. Inductive sensor: detection distance: 2mm.
Ultrasound sensor: transmitter sensibility: 106 dB., receiver sensibility:
65 dB., resonance frequency: 40kHz.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module. Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
1.- How to use a capacitative sensor to detect metal objects
as the pass in front of the sensor.
2.- To use a Hall effect sensor as an element to detect the
presence of magnetic objects.
3.- Reflection infrared sensor. To use an optical sensor that
works through infrared light reflection.
4.- Infrared sensor by transmission. To detect objects using
an infrared sensor by light beam interruption.
5.- Conduction sensor. To detect magnetic objects using a
REED switch sensor.
6.- To detect the presence of ferrous object using an inductive
sensor.
7.- Ultrasound sensor. To detect metallic and non-metallic
object using high frequency sounds.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
BS9.Pneumatic Test Module
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The Pneumatics Test Module “BS9” has been designed to teach
techniques of control and handling of a pneumatic piston.
Painted steel box. Connection diagrams for each transducer are
represented graphically.
Proportional valve 1 and 2: Nominal voltage: 24Vdc, pressure range:
8 bar max., 0 to 6 bar control. Pneumatic switch: max. pressure: 6
bars. Regulation filter: manual drainage, max. input pressure: 8 bars.
Differential pressure sensor: measurement range: 0 to 30 psi. LVDT
Sensor.
Sensor connections with the Base Unit (BSPC or BSUB) and with power
supplies is through 2 mm terminals located in the front panel of the
Test Module.
Manuals: It is supplied with 8 manuals.
Each module may operate independently of another.
Dimensions (approx.) = 400x270x200 mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.-
2.-
3.4.-
Proportional valves. To control electronically the vertical
displacement of a double effect pneumatic piston using
proportional valves.
Differential pressure sensor. To use a pressure sensor for
measuring the pressure difference between both
pneumatic piston air inlets.
Pneumatic switch. To deflect the air flow in the BS9 system
using a pneumatic switch.
LVDT Linear Displacement Sensor. To measure pneumatic
piston displacement using an excitation and DC output
LVDT.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/
en/units/electronics/transducerssensors/BS.pdf
Non computer controlled version available.
Page 21
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.3-Basic
Transducers
and Sensors
2.1Electronics
issue:01/11
CONTROL ELECTRONICS MODULE
Ref: 0240
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
RYC
RYC.Unit
DAB
RYC/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION
AND CONTROL, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED BY:
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF REGULATION
AND CONTROL INCLUDING THE CONTROL INTERFACE
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF REGULATION AND CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
2
RYC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
REGULATION AND CONTROL (RESULTS CALCULATION
AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
CADDA
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND
D/A CONVERTERS, COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A
CONVERTERS INCLUDING CONTROL INTERFACE
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION+ DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF A/D AND D/A CONVERTERS
1
CADDA Unit
DAB
CADDA/CCSOF
1
1
1
4
CADDA/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR A/D
AND D/A CONVERTERS (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
5
0240PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
6
0240PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
7
0240IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
8
0240CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
9
0240TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
0240MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
10
Ref: 0240
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.4- Control Electronics
RYC. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation and Control
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2
1
Unit: RYC. Teaching Unit for the Study of Regulation
and Control, including Control Interface
Data
Acquisition
Board
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
3
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
RYC Unit:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Steel box. 3 Modules of Controller of 1st Order. 3 Modules of Integrator. 2 Modules of Inverter Amplifier.
Module of Inverter Reductor. Module of Negative Zero. Module of Positive Zero. Module of Hysteresis.
Module of Limiter. Module of Controller of 2nd Order. Module of Adding.14 Capacitors from 1mF to 100mF.
6 Diodes. 34 Operational Amplifiers. 33 Potentiometers.186 Resistances. 2 Transistors. On/Off switch.
Fuse. Connector to PC. Control Interface.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 RYC/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible,
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on
all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to
250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification
of the conditions during the process.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
1
1.-Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional Block.
2.-Study in open loop Nº2: Integrative Block.
3.-Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.-Study in open loop Nº4: Second order plants.
5.-Study in open loop Nº5: Non-line plants: Limitation
and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº6: Blocks Composition:
Negative Zero and Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by means of
Quantitative Optimum 1st order system.
8.- Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by means of
Quantitative Optimum 2nd order system.
Other practical possibilities:
Analog regulators procedure: (9-11):
9.-First order filter.
10.-Integral regulator.
11.-Regulating I+P with phase advance in the feedback.
12.-Potentiometer adjustment.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/RYC.pdf
CADDA. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A) Converters
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
1
Unit: CADDA. Teaching Unit for the Study of A/D and D/A
Converters, including Control Interface.
2
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
CADDA Unit:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit. Steel box.
In this unit, the elements are separated in two parts: lefthand part for analog to digital conversions, and
right hand part for digital to analog conversions.
Analog/Digital converter board. Digital/Analog converter board.
Signal generator board, with 100 to 330 mF capacitors, 10 to 50K potentiometers and 1 to 100K
resistors.
Female and male connectors, interconnections.
Power supply.
LPF-Low Pass Filter: 2nd order low pass filter, needed to convert analog signals to digital. Sample/Hold
module. Comparator module. Clock module. Analog switch. Ramp module. A/D control module. D/A
module, including an integrated digital to analog converter. A/D module, including an integrated
analog to digital converter. Counter module. Waveform generator. 8 analog switches, all are managed
by a PC. Weighted resistors: 8 resistances are connected to a common point. D/A module: same
module than described before “D/A”. Analog input and output for PC. Serial lock 1 module. Adding
module: same module as previously described ”Adding”. Serial lock 2 module: same module than serial
lock 1, but based only on an inverter. R/2R : stair of resistance R/2R. Potentiometer. D/A control module.
Operational amplifier. Two capacities of 100nF with common connection.Sample/Hold module: same
module as previously described “Sample/Hold”.
Control Interface.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to:250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 CADDA/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of all process variables in an automatic and simultaneously way. Flexible,
open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously
on all process parameters. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling
velocity up to 250,000 data per second. Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process
and modification of the conditions during the process.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 450 x 470 mm. Weight: 40 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/control/CADDA.pdf
Page 24
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Sampling theorem.
2.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Monopolar
assembly.
3.- Analog/Digital integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
4.- Monopolar binary ramp converter.
5.- Quantification effects.
6.-Bipolar binary ramp converter.
7.-Binary ramp converter with continuous monopolar
counting.
8.-Binary ramp converter with bipolar continuous
counting.
9.-Monopolar simple ramp.
10.- Bipolar simple ramp converter.
11.- Monopolar double ramp converter.
12.- Double bipolar ramp converter.
13.- Monopolar converter of successive approximations.
14.- Bipolar converter of successive approximations.
15.- Integrated Digital/Analog converter. Monopolar
assembly.
16.- Digital/Analog integrated converter. Bipolar assembly.
17.- Digitalization and reconstruction of monopolar signals.
18.- Digitalization and reconstruction of bipolar signals.
19.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of weighted
resistance.
20.- Digital/Analog bipolar converter of weighted
resistance.
21.- Analog switches errors.
22.- R/2R monopolar stair converter.
23.- R/2R bipolar stair converter.
24.-Current division in R/2R stairs.
25.-Digital/Analog converter of monopolar inverted stair.
26.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of inverted stair.
27.-Digital/Analog monopolar converter of series blocking.
28.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of series blocking.
29.-Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
30.-Bipolar Digital/Analog converter of load balance.
31.-Monopolar Digital/Analog converter of pulse width
modulation.
32.-Digital/Analog bipolar converter of pulse width
modulation.
issue:01/11
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS MODULE
Ref: 0250
ITEM
1
1 / 2
REFERENCE
TDS
TDS.Unit
DAB
TDS/CCSOF
DESCRIPTION
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF DIGITAL
SIGNAL PROCESSING, COMPUTER CONTROLLED.
FORMED BY:
TEACHING EQUIPMENT FOR STUDY OF DIGITAL
SIGNAL PROCESSING INCLUDING CONTROL
INTERFACE
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ADQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR TEACHING EQUIPMENT
FOR STUDY OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING
QTY.
1
1
1
1
2
TDS/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR STUDY
OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
3
0250PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
0250PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
0250IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
0250CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
0250TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
0250MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0250
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.5-Basic
Digital
Electronics
2.1Electronics
2.- Electronics
TDS. Computer Controlled Teaching Unit for the Study of Digital Signal Processing
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
RTC. EDIBON Real Time Control System
Control
Interface
included
in the unit
2
Data
Acquisition
Board
1
Unit: TDS. Teaching Unit for the Study of Digital
Signal Processing, including Control Interface
3
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
4 Cables and Accessories
5 Manuals
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
TDS Unit:
Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Steel box.
Front Panel:
2 Function generators modules, that can generate 3 different signals: sinusoidal, square and
triangular. Each one includes: wave forms selector, frequency selector, amplitude selector.
Duty cycle selector.
Signal output.
Noise generator module, that can generate two noise type. Including: 2 noise outputs, attenuator
selector per each noise type.
Microphone pre-amplifier module, including: input (microphone), outputs (2 connectors).
Power amplifier module, including: inputs (2 connectors), output (1 connector), volume selector.
Speaker module.
PC input/output module, including: 2 inputs. 2 outputs.
Power On/Off switch.
Lateral panel:
SCSI connector for connecting with the data acquisition board (DAB) to be placed in the computer.
Back panel:
Power supply connector.
Safety fuse.
Inside:
Power supply.
2 Signal generation boards (PBC).
White and pink noise generation board (PBC).
Power amplifier board (PBC).
Pre-amplifier board (PBC). Control interface.
Possibility of working simultaneously with two external signals, thanks to its inputs, facilitating operations that required more
than one signal.
Moreover it is possible to generate signals directly by the software and send them to the unit outputs and then visualizing by
an external oscilloscope or listening by the speaker.
2 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s.
2 Analog outputs.
24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
3 TDS/CCSOF.Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Registration and visualization of signals in an automatic and simultaneously way.
2 signals can be visualized simultaneously.
Flexible, open and multicontrol software, developed with actual windows graphic systems, acting simultaneously on all
process parameters.
Management, processing and comparison of data.
Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second.
Comparative analysis of the obtained data, after to the process and modification of the conditions during the process.
4 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm. Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/digital/TDS.pdf
1.- Continuous wave form generation,
with the impossibility of varying the
frequency and amplitude of signals,
besides of duty cycle.
2.- Characterization of signals. To
analyze the nature of the signals:
sinusoidal, square, triangular and
sawtooth.
3.-
Possibility of working simultaneously
with two external signals.
4.- Possibility of generating signals
directly by the software and send
them to the unit outputs and then
visualizing or listening by the
speaker or an external oscilloscope.
5.- Signal digitalization, permitting the
most suitable sampling time,
avoiding “aliasing”.
6.- Digitalization of signals with the
possibility of adjusting the sampling
frequency.
7.- Fast Fourier Transform (Power
Spectrum).
8.-
Addition, subtraction, multiplication,
convolution and auto-convolution of
signals.
9.- Study of “aliasing”.
10.- Application of the frequency
convolution theorem.
11.- Study of different noise types: White
Uniform noise, White Gaussian
noise,1/f noise, Poisson noise,
Random noise,Gamma noise.
12.- Representation of the Bode
diagram and Nyquist diagram of
any transfer function, and phase
information.
13.- Study and use of filters:
- Possibility of filtration of any signal.
- Reconstructions of signals through
the application of filters.-Finite
Impulse Response (FIR) Filters.Infinite Impulse Response (IIR)
Filters.
- Possibility to use Bartlett, Hanning,
Hamming, Kaiser, Parzen, etc.
windows for applying on the signal.
Page 25
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
MICROPROCESSORS MODULE
Ref: 0270
ITEM
1 / 2
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
EBC-100
BASE UNIT, WITH BUILT IN POWER SUPPLY
1
2
M31
Z80 MICROPROCESSOR MODULE
1
3
M31/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF Z80
MICROPROCESSOR
1
4
M31/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR Z80
MICROPROCESSOR (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
5
M32
6
M32/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF 8051
MICROCONTROLLER
1
7
M32/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 8051
MICROCONTROLLER (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
8
M-EB
EXPANSION BOARD
1
9
M33
68000 MICROPROCESOR MODULE
1
10
M33/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF
68000 MICROPROCESOR
1
11
M33/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR 68000
MICROPROCESSOR (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
12
M34
DSP MICROPROCESSOR MODULE
1
13
M34/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF DSP
MICROPROCESSOR
1
14
M34/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR DSP
MICROPROCESSOR (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
15
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
16
FACO
POWER SUPPLY
1
17
EDAS/VIS-0.25
1
DAIB
DAB
EDAS/SOF
EDIBON DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM/VIRTUAL
INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM (250.000 samples per
second), FORMED BY:
VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION (Oscilloscope,
Multimeter, Function Generator, Spectrum
Analyzer, Transient Record, Logic Analyzer
and Logic Generator)
DATA ACQUISITION INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
18
0270PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
19
0270PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
20
0270IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
21
0270CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
22
0270TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
23
0270MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
VIS
8051 MICROCONTROLLER MODULE
1
1
Ref: 0270
2 / 2
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 20 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Laboratory structure
2
1
Modules
(power supply needed)
Power Supply
2
FA-CO
(M1)
(M9)
(M2)
Modules
(power supply needed)
(M10)
or
EBC-100
(M11)
(M16)
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M17)
INS/SOF.
(M12)
Instructor Software
(M3)
+
(M13)
M../SOF.
Student/Module Software
4
(M4)
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software
(M14)
(Results Calculation and Analysis)
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M15)
(M5)
(M31)
(M6)
5
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/
Virtual Instrumentation System
Used
Teaching
Technique
(M7)
DAIB.
(M60)
Data acquisition interface box
(M65)
(M8)
DAB. Data acquisition board
Data Acquisition and
Virtual Instrumentation
Software
EDAS/VIS-SOF.
Other modules
Expansion Board
(M99)
The complete laboratory includes parts 1 to 5 and any part can be supplied individually or additionally. (Power supply + Module/s is the
minimum supply).
Some available Modules
Basic Electricity:
" M14. Optoelectronics.
" M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits.
" M15. Development Module.
" M2. Alternating Current (A.C.)Circuits. Basic Electronics: Transducers:
" M16. Electric Networks.
" M41. Resistance Transducers.
" M17. Electromagnetism.
" M43. Applications of Temperature.
Basic Electronics:
" M44. Applications of Light.
" M3. Semiconductors I.
" M45. Linear Position and Force.
" M4. Semiconductors II.
" M46. Environmental Measurements.
" M5. Power Supplies.
" M47. Rotational Speed & Position
Control.
" M6. Oscillators.
" M48. Sounds Measurements.
" M7. Operational Amplifiers.
" M49. Applications of Temperature and
" M8. Filters.
Pressure.
" M9. Power Electronics.
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics:
" M10. Digital Systems & Converters.
" M60. Analog/Digital Converters.
" M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
" M61. Digital/Analog Converters.
" M12. Basic Combinational Circuits.
" M65. Control and Regulation.
" M13. Basic Sequential Circuits.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities:
" M99. Expansion Board.
Some electronic sub-boards available:
"M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
"M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
"M99-3. Function Generator.
"M99-4. AM Modulator.
"M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can develop any electronic sub-board
according to the application required by
the customer.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 5
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
1 Power Supply
There are two choices for suppling the modules:
FA-CO. Power Supply
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Fixed outputs: + 5 V, ± 12 V, 1 A. Variable outputs: ± 12 V, 0.5 A. AC output: 12V. Outputs through either 2mm. contact terminals, or
through 25 pin CENTRONICS connectors. LED’s voltage indicators. Supply: 110/220V A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
This power supply FA-CO includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 225x205x200mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
or
EBC-100. Base Unit
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Hardware support and power supply. Modules supporting unit.
Variable outputs ± 12 V. Fixed outputs + 5V, + 12V, -12V, -5V. Supply: 110/220 V. A.C. Frequency: 50/60 Hz. Power through
CENTRONICS connector. This base unit EBC-100 includes all the requirements for full working with any module from M1 to M99.
Dimensions: 410x298x107mm. approx. Weight: 2Kg approx.
2
Modules
These Modules have been designed for making practices using either the FA-CO Power Supply or the EBC-100 Base Unit. The Modules consist in a series of different circuits
which shall allow performing the corresponding exercises separately. All circuits are serigraphed on the surface of each module, thus permitting vision of their REAL components.
Almost all exercises/practices have special switches so that the teacher may SIMULATE CIRCUITRY FAILURE (faults), to be found by the Student. We provide eight manuals per
module. Connectors and cables for completing the exercises and practices are included. Dimensions (approx.) of each module: 300 x 210 x 45 mm. Weight: 300 gr.
Basic Electricity
M1. Direct Current (D.C.) Circuits
Measurement managing and checking
instruments:
1.-Electronic instrumentation operation.
Use of multimeter.
2.-Study of fault F1 in Resistance circuit.
3.-Study of fault F2 in Resistance circuit.
4.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Ohm's Law:
5.-Ohm's Law verification.
6.-Power calculation.
7.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors: characteristics and types:
8.-Resistor measurements. Color code.
Ohmmeter.
9.-Study of Fault F1 in Resistors circuit.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
10.-Study of Fault F2 in Resistors circuit.
11.-Theoretical / practical exercises.
Resistors association and the Wheatstone
Bridge:
12.-Voltage and current measurement
in a circuit with resistors connected
in series.
13.-Series/Parallel configuration study.
14.-The Wheatstone Bridge.
15.-Study of Fault in Series Resistors
circuit.
16.-Study of Fault in Parallel Resistors
circuit.
17.-Study of Fault F1 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
M2. Alternating Current (A.C.) Circuits
Alternating signal characteristics.
Instruments:
1.- Waveforms study in A.C.
2.- Introduction of anomalies in the
Wave form circuit.
3.- Study of Faults in the Waveform
circuit.
4.- Relation between peak values and
RMS for sinusoidal waves.
5.- Resistance in a sinusoidal
alternating current.
6.-Measurements using the
oscilloscope.
7.- Voltage and current phase angles
for resistors in sinusoidal
alternating current.
8.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in series.
9.- Sinusoidal A.C. resistors in parallel.
10.- Exercises.
Behaviour of A.C. capacitors and inductors:
11.- Capacitance with square waveform
and sinusoidal input current.
12.- Inductance with square waveform
and a sinusoidal input voltage.
13.- Reactive reactance, Xc, variations
18.- Study of Fault F2 in Wheatstone
Bridge circuit.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Kirchoff's laws:
20.- Kirchoff's first law.
21.- Kirchoff's second law.
22.- Fault study using Kirchoff's law.
23.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage/Current dividers.
Batteries and Switches.
Power source in series and parallel.
The Rheostat and Potentiometer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
with the frequency.
14.-Study of faults in capacitors.
15.-Reactive capacitance variations with
the capacitance.
16.-A.C. capacitors in parallel.
17.-A.C. capacitors in series.
18.-A.C. capacitors as voltage dividers.
19.-Inductance in an A.C circuit.
20.-Inductive reactance variations with
the inductance.
21.-Inductors in series in an A.C. circuit.
22.-Exercises.
Basic theorems and capacitance and
inductance circuits:
23.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
series.
24.-A.C. Resistor-Capacitor circuits in
parallel.
25.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
series.
26.-Study of Fault 1 in the Circuit #3.
27.-Study of Fault 2 in the Circuit #3.
28.-A.C. Resistor-Inductor circuits in
parallel.
29.-Exercises.
RLC Circuits:
30.- Resistance-Capacitance Filters.
31.- Filters inductive resistance. Low Pass
and High- Pass filters.
32.- Exercises.
Resonance:
33.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with low
impedance source.
34.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
35.- Study of Fault 2 in the resonance
Circuit.
36.- A.C. L-C Circuits in parallel with high
impedance source.
37.- Circuit frequency response and
bandwidth.
38.- A.C. R-L-C Circuits in series.
39.- Study of Fault 1 in the resonance
circuit.
40.- Exercises.
The transformer:
41.- The transformer.
42.- The transformer with load.
43.- Current measurement in the
secondary Transformer with Charge.
44.- Exercises.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M16. Electric Networks
Ohm’s law:
1.-Calculation of the internal resistance
of a continuous source.
2.-Error study in an internal resistance.
3.-Internal resistance calculation of an
alternating source.
4.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Electrical power:
5.-Power transferred by a DC source to
load.
6.-Power transferred to a load by an AC
source.
7.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Power supplies combination:
8.-DC+DC assembly.
9.- Error study in the circuit, assembly.
10.-DC+AC assembly.
11.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Thévenin’s and Norton’s theorems:
12.-Thévenin and Norton equivalent
circuits. Conversion. Kirchoff’s laws.
13.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
Superposition theorem:
14.-Application of the Superposition
theorem.
15.-Error study in the Superposition
circuit. Component values
modifications.
16.-Theoretical/practical exercises.
1.-Magnetic fields measurement.
2.-Induced electromotive force. Coil
Reactance calculation.
3.-Exercises.
Electromagnetic applications:
4.-Mutual Inductance.
5.-Basic operation of the transformer
6.-Core effect in a transformer response.
7.-Fault study in the Transformer.
8.- Basic operation of the solenoid.
9.- Fault study in the Solenoid circuit.
10.-Basic operation of a relay.
11.-Self-holding of the position of the
contacts.
12.-Fault study in the Relay circuit.
13.-Exercises.
Direct current motor:
14.-Characteristic Speed/Voltage of a
M17. Electromagnetism
Star-triangle transformation:
17.- Resistance measurement between
terminals. Delta| Y configurations.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Wheatstone bridge:
19.- Calibration of a Wheatstone bridge
fed by a DC source.
20.- Error study in the Wheatstone bridge
circuit.
21.- Wheatstone bridge calibration fed
by an AC source.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Millman’s Theorem.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 6
continuous current motor.
15.- Motor used as DC generator.
16.- Cemf.
17.- Exercises.
Stepping Motor:
18.- Stepper motor working.
19.- Fault study in Stepping motor circuit.
20.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
M3. Semiconductors I
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Characteristics of the PN junction:
1.- Study of the diode.
2.- Fault Study in Diodes.
3.- Exercises.
The diode as a rectifier element:
4.- Half wave rectifier.
5.- Study of faults in Rectifier circuit.
6.- Bridge rectifier.
7.- Study of faults in bridge rectifier.
8.- Exercises.
The Zener diode:
9.- Voltage regulator with a Zener diode.
10.- Study of faults in Zener circuit.
11.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the transistor:
12.- Study of the transistor.
13.- Study of the fault in the transistor.
14.- Exercises.
Transistor characteristics operating as a
switch:
Complementary transistors pair:
1.- Complementary transistors pair.
2.- Transistors pair with alternating signal.
3.- Fault study of the complementary
Transistor pair.
4.- Exercises.
Darlington configuration:
5.- Darlington configuration.
6.- Fault study of the Darlington
configuration.
7.- Exercises.
Differential amplifier:
8.- Differential amplifier.
9.- Fault study in the differential amplifier.
10.- Exercises.
Study and characteristics of the JFET
transistor:
11.- JFET characteristics.
12.- Fault study with the JFET transistor.
13.- Exercises.
Rectification:
1.- Rectification.
2.- Bridge rectifier.
3.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Fixed voltage sources:
4.- Power supply with the Zener diode.
5.- Stabilization through Zener and
Transistor.
6.- Fault study in “Stabilization through
Zener and Transistor”.
7.- Protection against overcurrents.
8.- Protection against overvoltages.
9.- Study of the fault “Protection against
overcurrents”.
10.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Symmetrical voltage power sources:
11.- Symmetrical source; 78XX regulator.
12.- Symmetrical source; 79XX regulator.
13.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Voltage regulators with integrated circuits:
14.- Adjustable regulator; LM317.
15.- Study of fault in adjustable LM317.
15.- Study of the transistor as a switch.
16.- Exercises.
Common emitter amplifier:
17.- Study of the common emitter NPN
amplifier.
18.- Fault Study in Amplifier circuit.
19.- Study of the common emitter PNP
amplifier.
20.- Exercises.
M4. Semiconductors II
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switch:
14.- Analog switch.
15.- Exercises.
Multistage Amplifier. Direct coupling:
16.- Amplifier coupled directly.
17.- Fault study of an amplifier coupled
directly.
18.- Exercises.
M5. Power Supplies
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
16.- Adjustable L200 regulator.
17.- Fault Study in adjustable L200.
18.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Introduction to switched power supplies:
19.- Switching technique.
20.- Switching technique. PWM.
21.- Switching technique. Boost.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Voltage Feedback.
DC-DC converter.
M6. Oscillators
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Oscillators. RC and LC Nets:
1.- RC net oscillator.
2.- LC net oscillator.
3.- Faults study with RC and LC Net
oscillators.
4.- Exercises.
Wien bridge oscillator:
5.- Wien Bridge.
6.- Fault study the Wien bridge oscillator.
7.- Exercises.
Colpitts oscillator. Hartley oscillator:
8.- Colpitts oscillator.
9.- Hartley oscillator.
10.- Faults study with the Colpitts
Oscillator.
11.- Exercises.
Astable multivibrator:
12.- Astable multivibrator.
13.- Fault study with an Astable
mulltivibrator.
14.- Exercises.
555 TIMER:
15.- 555 timer.
16.- 555 timer fault study.
17.- Exercises.
M7. Operational Amplifiers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Operational amplifier characteristics:
1.- Operational amplifier study.
2.- Closed-loop output compensation
voltage.
3.- Operational amplifier fault study.
4.- Exercises.
The inverting amplifier:
5.- Inverting amplifier study.
6.- Inverting amplifier fault study.
7.- Exercises.
The non-inverting amplifier:
8.- Study of the non-inverting amplifier.
16.- Differential amplifier fault study.
9.- Voltage follower.
17.- Exercises.
10.- Fault study in the non-inverting Comparators:
Amplifier.
18.- Comparator study.
11.- Exercises.
19.- Comparators fault study.
The adder amplifier:
20.- Exercises.
12.- Adding amplifier study.
Additional Possibilities:
13.- Fault study in the adding amplifier.
Attenuator.
14.- Exercises.
Voltage Divider.
The differential amplifier:
Open-loop operation.
15.- Differential amplifier study.
RC and LC filter responses:
1.- Frequency response.
2.- Low-pass filter.
3.- High-pass filter.
4.- LC Circuit.
5.- Study of Error in Low-pass filter.
6.- Study of Error in High-pass filter.
7.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
T-shaped Filter:
8.- Filter with double T link.
9.- Generator circuit of the signal S1.
10.- Study of Error in RC filter with double T.
11.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Active filters:
12.- Low-pass filter.
13.- Low-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
14.- High-pass filter.
15.- High-pass filter with load and
operational amplifier.
16.- The attenuation is cumulative.
17.- Use of Operational Amplifier.
M8. Filters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
M9. Power Electronics
18.- Study of Faults in filters.
19.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Association of filters:
20.- Behaviour of the filter.
21.- Filter of distorted signal.
22.- Filter in cascade; low pass filter and
high pass filter.
23.- Filter in parallel.
24.- Study of Error in filters.
25.- Exercises theoretical/practical.
Additional Possibilities:
Band-Pass and Band-Stop Filters.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The bipolar power transistor:
1.-Study of the power transistor.
2.-Study of faults in the power transistor.
3.-Exercises.
The MOSFET transistor:
4.-Study of the MOSFET transistor.
5.-Study of faults in the MOSFET.
6.-Exercises.
The thyristor:
7.- Study of the thyristor.
8.- Study of the error of the thyristor.
9.- Exercises.
The UJT transistor and trigger circuits of the
thyristor:
10.- Study of the trigger circuits of the
thyristor.
11.- Study of insulation circuits.
12.- Exercises.
The TRIAC:
13.- Study of the TRIAC.
14.- Practical assembly of the TRIAC.
15.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Half/Full wave control.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 7
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics
(continuation)
M10. Digital Systems and Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Analog switching. The bistable, astable
and monostable family:
1.-Characteristics of an analog switch
chip.
2.-Study of the error F1 in the Analog
Multiplexer.
3.-Study of the errors in the Analog
Multiplexer.
4.-Characteristics of an S-R type Latch
Integrated circuit.
5.-Error Study in the bistable.
6.-Characteristics of an integrated
astable circuit.
7.-Error Study in the astable.
8.-Characteristics of an integrated
Monostable circuit.
9.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Behaviour of Binary/BCD Counters & 7segments Displays:
10.- Characteristics of Binary UP/DOWN
Counter 74LS193 and 7-Segment
Display.
11.- Error Study in the binary counter.
12.- C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e B C D
UP/DOWN counter and 7-Segment
Display.
13.- Error Study in the BCD counter.
14.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Comparators and analog integrators:
15.- Characteristics of an analog
comparator.
16.- Analog integrator.
17.- Error Study in the analog integrator.
18.- Triangular wave generation.
19.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
A/D and D/A conversion:
20.- D/A Converter.
21.- A/D Converter.
22.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Applications:
23.- Random number generator.
24.- Measuring the time between two
events.
25.- Theoretical/practical exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
Synchronous/Asynchronous Counter.
M11. Digital Electronics Fundamentals
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Numbers systems:
1.- Voltage measurement in a circuit of
sources.
2.- Fault study in the source circuit.
3.- Exercises.
Logical circuits:
4.- Logical Diode.
5.- Fault study in Sources.
6.- Logic with transistor and diodes.
7.- Fault study in transistor/diode circuit.
8.- Exercises.
TTL gates:
9.- Basic function gates.
10.- Fault study in TTL circuit.
11.- Fault study in Logic Gates.
12.- Exercises.
CMOS gates:
13.- Basic function gates.
14.- Fault study in CMOS circuit.
15.- Exercises.
Boolean Algebra and logical functions:
16.- Study of use of Circuit #3.
17.- Exercises.
Open collector gates:
18.- Study of the use of Circuit #5.
19.- Exercises.
Others types of integrated gates:
20.- Study of simple operations with a
Schmitt Trigger inverter.
21.- Operation study of a three-state
buffer.
22.- Study of the fault in the Circuit #7.
23.- Exercises.
Additional Possibilities:
JK Flip-Flop.
Control of Data Bus.
M12. Basic Combinational Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Encoders:
1.- Study of an encoder.
2.- Fault study in the encoder.
3.- Exercises.
Decoders:
4.- Study of a decoder.
5.- Fault study in the decoder.
6.- Exercises.
Multiplexers:
7.- Study of a multiplexer.
8.- Study of the errors in the multiplexers.
9.- Exercises.
Demultiplexers:
10.- Study of a demultiplexer.
11.- Study of the errors in demultiplexers.
12.- Exercises.
Digital Comparators:
13.- Study of a comparator.
14.- Study of the errors in a comparator.
15.- Exercises.
Arithmetic and logic operations:
16.- Study of an adder.
17.- Study of the error in the arithmetic
and logic operations.
18.- Study of a parity generator.
19.- Study of the error in the Parity
generator.
20.- Exercises.
M13. Basic Sequential Circuits
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Bistables:
1.- Bistables.
2.- Bistable S-R using NAND gates.
3.- Practical performance.
4.- Study of error in the Bistables.
5.- Exercises.
Shift registers:
6.- Shift registers.
7.- Study of faults of the Shift registers.
8.- Exercises.
Counters:
9.- Practice of the Counters.
10.- Study of faults of the Counters.
11.- Exercises.
Synchronised sequential circuits:
12.- Practice of the Synchronised.
13.- Study of errors of the Synchronised
Sequential circuits.
14.- Exercises.
Memories:
15.- Exercises.
M14. Optoelectronics
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Light transmitters and liquid crystal display
(LCD):
1.- Light transmitters.
2.- Bar graph.
3.- LCD display and 7-segment display.
4.- Fault Study in light transmitters and
liquid crystal display.
5.- Exercises.
Photo-conducting cells:
6.- Light dependent resistors.
7.- Alarm.
8.- Fault study on the photo-conducting
cell.
9.- Exercises.
Fibre optics:
10.- Fibre optics practice.
M15. Development Module
MAIN FEATURES
This is a module to build and implement
student’s own circuits, it consists on:
Development board.
Power supply connector.
Digital visual display unit.
Logical source.
Set of potentiometers.
Pulse generator and inverters.
Interrupter.
Clock.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 8
11.- Fault study using fibre optics.
12.- Exercises.
Infrared:
13.- Circuit with infrared diodes.
14.- Fault study of the infrared diodes.
15.- Exercises.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics:Transducers
M41. Resistance Transducers
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Linearly sliding potentiometer.
2.- Rotary carbon-track potentiometer.
3.- Rotary coil potentiometer.
4.- Precision servo-potentiometer.
M43. Applications of Temperature
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- Construction of a digital thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance
(T.D.R) transducer.
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C
thermistor.
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor
used in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
thermopar.
M44. Applications of Light
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Photovoltaic Cell.
2.- Characteristics of a photovoltaic cell.
3.- Phototransistor.
4.- Characteristics of a phototransistor.
5.- Photodiode PIN.
6.- Characteristics of a PIN photodiode.
7.- Photoconductive Cell.
8.- Luminous intensity detector.
M45. Linear Position and Force
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Linear Variable
Differential Transformer (LVDT).
2.- Characteristics of a Variable
Resistance.
3.-The characteristics of a strain gauge
Transducer.
M-46. Environmental Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of Air flow Sensor.
2.- Characteristics of Air pressure
Sensor.
3.- Characteristics of Humidity Sensor.
M-47. Rotational Speed and Position Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a slotted opto
transducer and its applications for
counting and speed measurement.
2.- Characteristics of the reflective
opto-transducer.
3.- Characteristics of an inductive
transducer.
5.- Characteristics of a D.C. Permanent
Magnet tachogenerator.
4.- Characteristics of a half effect
transducer.
M-48. Sounds Measurements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Characteristics of a Dynamic
Microphone.
2.- Characteristics of an ultrasonic
Receiver.
3.- Theoretical/Practical questions.
M-49. Applications of Temperature and Pressure
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
The integrated circuit temperature
transducer:
1.- Characteristics of an integrated
temperature circuit.
2.- C o n s t r u c t i o n o f a d i g i t a l
thermometer.
The (T.D.R.) Platinum transducer:
3.- Characteristics of a platinum
Temperature Dependent Resistance The “K” type thermocouple temperature
thermistor:
(T.D.R) transducer.
6.- Characteristics of a ‘K’ type
The N.T.C (Negative Temperature
thermocouple.
Coefficient) thermistor:
4.- Characteristics of an N.T.C thermistor. Pressure transducer:
7.- Characteristic of a pressure
5.- N.T.C Characteristics. Thermistor used
transducer.
in an alarm circuit (double
thermistor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 9
www.edibon.com
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Modules (continuation)
Basic Electronics: Control Electronics
M60. Analog/Digital Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Binary Slope Converter.
5.- Flash Converter.
2.- Integrated converter.
3.- Simple Slope Converter.
4.- Double Slope Converter.
M-61. Digital/Analog Converters
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Weighted Resistance Converter.
5.- Pulse - Width Modulation Converter.
2.- Ladder Converter R/2R.
3.- Integrated Converter.
4.- Series Blocking Converter.
M-65. Control and Regulation
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study in open loop Nº1: Proportional
block.
2.- Study in open loop Nº2: Integrator
block.
3.- Study in open loop Nº3: Simple pole.
4.- Study in open loop Nº4: 2nd order
plant.
5.- Study in open loop Nº5: Non lineal
Plants: Limitation and Hysteresis.
6.- Study in open loop Nº 6: Block
composition: Negative zero and
Negative Pole.
7.- Study in closed loop Nº1: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.1st
order system.
8.-Study in closed loop Nº2: Control by
means of Optimum Quantitative.
2nd order system.
Basic Electronics: Any other possibilities
M-99. Expansion Board
Example of an electronic
sub-board put in the
M99 Board
The aim of the M99 Expansion Board is to
provide generic support to up to 8
electronic sub-boards, each one with its
own specific functionality, customized to
client necessities.
The sub-boards have to be inserted in any of
the eight 32-pin female connectors
reserved for it on the M99 Board.
There are connectors, in both the subboards and on the M99, through which one
can access the internal input/output data
points, to take measures and get
information about the practice. Thus, the
student carries out the pedagogical aims.
In the upper right corner of the M99 board
there are 14 connectors for power supply.
Thanks to them, the sub-boards can be
supplied with different voltage intensities.
Either ”FA-CO” Power Supply or “EBC100” Base unit with built-in power supply,
are required to work with the M99
Expansion Board, like with any other
Module.
- Some electronic sub-boards already
developed:
M99-1. Analogical Commutator.
M99-2. Analogical Multiplier.
M99-3. Function Generator.
M99-4. AM Modulator.
M99-5. AM Demodulator.
* We can design and include any
electronic circuit or application on a
sub-board according to customer
requirements. This way, any
Modules can be complemented with
extra circuits, in extra sub-boards.
The sub-boards can also be
purchased independently to the
modules, thus giving total
freedom to customers in the
acquisition of circuits.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 10
9.-Potentiometer adjustment.
(continuation)
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
Software
3
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between module and computer, this complete package
consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with the
Student/Module Software (M../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the teacher
knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the students.
These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with all the
information on the subject of study.
+
Module
(electronic board)
Instructor
Software
Student/Module
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the modules, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
M../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Module
Software).
It explains how to use the module, run the experiments and what to do at any moment.
Each module has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the modules,
showing how to complete the circuits and get the right information from
them.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Module Software Packages:
-M8/SOF. Filters.
-M9/SOF. Power Electronics.
-M10/SOF. Digital Systems and Converters.
-M11/SOF. Digital Electronics Fundamentals.
-M12/SOF. Basic Combinational Circuits.
-M13/SOF. Basic Sequential Circuits.
-M14/SOF. Optoelectronics.
-M15/SOF. Development Module.
Basic Electronic: Transducers:
-M41/SOF. Resistance transducers.
-M43/SOF. Applications of Temperature.
Basic electricity
-M1/SOF. Direct Current Circuits(D.C.).
-M2/SOF. Alternating Current Circuits(A.C.).
-M16/SOF. Electric Networks.
-M17/SOF. Electromagnetism.
Basic Electronic:
-M3/SOF. Semiconductors I.
-M4/SOF. Semiconductors II.
-M5/SOF. Power Supplies.
-M6/SOF. Oscillators.
-M7/SOF. Operational Amplifiers.
4
-M44/SOF. Applications of light.
-M45/SOF. Linear Position and Force.
-M46/SOF. Environmental Measurement .
-M47/SOF. Rotational Speed and Position Control.
-M48/SOF. Sound Measurements.
-M49/SOF. Applications of Temperature and Pressure.
Basic Electronic: Control Electronics:
-M60/SOF. Analog/Digital Converters.
-M61/SOF. Digital/Analog Converters.
-M65/SOF. Control and Regulation.
LIEBA/CAL. Computer Aided Learning Software (Results Calculation and Analysis)
This Computer Aided Learning Software (CAL) is a Windows based software, simple and very easy to use specifically developed by EDIBON. It has been designed to cover
different areas of science: Basic Electronics, Communications, Basic Electricity, Mechanics, Basic Fluid Mechanics and General Fluid Mechanics.
On the Basic Electronics Area, it can be used with the M1 to M17 modules. These modules cover every subject in Basic Electricity and Electronics, both analog and digital.
CAL is a class assistant that helps in making the necessary calculations to extract the right conclusions from data obtained during the experimental practices.
With a single click, CAL computes the value of all the variables involved. Also, CAL gives the option of plotting and printing the results.
Simply insert the experimental data, with a single
click CAL will perform the calculations.
Once the Area of study is selected, the right module can
be chosen among a wide range, each one with its own
set of lab. exercises.
Among the given choices, an additional help button can be found, which offers a wide range of
information, such as constant values, unit conversion factors and integral and derivative tables:
It provides a handy option to avoid using different
reference sources while in progress. For example: the
values of Physical constants, their symbols and right
names, conversion factors...
...and the very useful Integral and Derivative
tables.
Between the plotting options, any variable can be represented against
any other. And there exist a great range of different plotting displays.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 11
www.edibon.com
2.- Electronics
2.1-Basic
Basic Electronics
Electronics
2.1-
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
5
1
2
Connection
points
4
Cables to
interface
EDAS/VIS. EDIBON Data Acquisition System/Virtual Instrumentation System
Data acquisition
and virtual
instrumentation
software
3
“n”
Module
(electronic board)
Data acquisition
interface box
Cable
to
computer
Data acquisition
board
Electronics
2.- Electronics
2.1- Basic Electronics
LIEBA. Basic Electronics and Electricity Integrated Laboratory:
Student
post
EDAS/VIS is the perfect link between the electronic modules and the PC. With the EDAS/VIS
system, information from the modules is sent to the computer. There, it can be analyzed and
represented.
We easily connect the Data Acquisition Interface Box (DAIB) to the modules with the supplied
cables (connection points are placed in the modules). Like any other hardware, the DAIB is
connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board (DAB), and by using the Data
Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software (specific for every module), the student can get
the results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the screen and work with
them.
This EDAS/VIS System includes DAIB + DAB + EDAS/VIS-SOF:
5.1)Hardware:
5.1.1)DAIB. Data Acquisition Interface Box:
Steel box. Dimensions: 310 x 220 x 145 mm. approx.
Front panel:
16 Analog inputs.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital inputs/outputs, configurable as inputs or outputs.
Digital signal simulator. Analog signal simulator.
Inside: Internal power supply of 12 and 5 V. Potentiometer.
Back panel:Power supply connector. SCSI connector (for connecting with the data acquisition board).
Connecting cables.
5.1.2) DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI board (National Instruments) to be placed in a
computer slot.
For EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version:
Analog inputs: 16. Sampling rate up to:
1,250,000 S/s.
Analog outputs: 2.
Digital Input/Output: 24 inputs/outputs.
For EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version:
This is a similar version to the 1.25, with t h e
only difference that for this one, the sampling
rate to 250,000 S/s .
DAB
5.2) EDAS/VIS-SOF. Data Acquisition and Virtual Instrumentation Software:
It works as:
-Digital oscilloscope.
-Multimeter.
DAIB
-Function generator.
-Spectrum analyzer.
-Transient recorder.
-Logic analyzer
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different inputs and outputs.
It stores acquired data in a file (16 analog inputs, 2 analog outputs, 24 digital inputs/outputs at the same
time) for further analysis. Print screens and reports of the signals at any time. Quick capture in a period of
time and posterior representation. Two signal generators, independent for sinusoidal, triangular, saw and
square. Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity 1,250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 1.25 Version.
Sampling velocity 250,000 samples per second for EDAS/VIS 0.25 Version.
Measurement, analysis, visualization, representation and report of results. All 16 input channels could be
scaled to compare signal with different voltage levels.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electronics/basic/LIEBA.pdf
Page 12
Higher Education Telecommunications Laboratory
(3HE)
List of modules and teaching units included plus
Summarised Catalogues
Priority 3
0400. Electricity
0433-430/10S: Industrial Electric Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
0433-431/10S: Industrial Electric Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
0433-432/10S: Industrial Electric Installations (10 CAI + CAL)
0600. Automation & Systems
0610: PLC Trainer
0620: PLC Process Emulators Applications Module
0652: Automation (Control) Module
1000. Process Control
1010: Process Control Basic Module
1000/ESN: EDIBON Scada-Net for Process Control
Ref.:3HE-pre(01/11)
issue:01/11
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0433-430/10S
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
LIELBA .
"INDUSTRIAL " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
AI1
ALI01
ALI03
CON01
IAM20
APPLICATION - STAR - DELTA STARTER,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
3-POLE MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC SWITCH 4
A, CURVE C.
NETWORK ANALYZER.
PUSH-BUTTONS WITH LIGHT (24 VAC).
THERMAL RELAY (1.6 - 2.5 A).
TIME RELAY (0.6 - 60 SEC.).
MOTOR (EMT7) (SQUIRREL CAGE).
1
1
1
3
1
MED60
PUL04
REL02
REL11
VAR02
1
1
1
1
1
2
AI1/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - STAR - DELTA STARTER
10
3
AI1/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - STAR - DELTA STARTER.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
4
AI4
ALI01
CAR30
CAR31
CAR32
CAR33
LAM09
LAM26
MED65
REL50
VAR02
VAR15
TRA28
VAR16
APPLICATION - STARTER- INVERTER, INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
INDUCTANCES MODULE
CAPACITORS MODULE
RECTIFIER DIODES MODULE
RESISTIVE COMPONENTS MODULE
FLUORESCENT LAMP.
LIGHTING MODULE
DIGITAL MULTIMETER.
RELAYS
MOTOR (EMT7) (SQUIRREL CAGE).
SINGLE-PHASE MOTOR OF CAPACITOR
THREE-PHASE TRANSFORMER
ELECTROMAGNETISM KITS WITH GROUP OF MOTORGENERATOR
DISMANTLED TRANSFORMER KIT
ELECTROSTATIC KIT
OPEN UNIVERSAL MOTOR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
VAR17
VAR18
VAR25
1
1
1
5
AI4/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - STARTER- INVERTER
10
6
AI4/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - STARTER- INVERTER. (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
AI6
ALI01
ALI04
CAR23
VAR04
APPLICATION - DC MOTOR STARTER, INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
DC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (+ 12, 0, -12VDC).
DC STARTING RHEOSTAT.
MOTOR (EMT5) (DC MOTOR).
1
1
1
1
1
Ref: 0433-430/10S
ITEM
7
2 / 3
REFERENCE
PUL04
CON03
IAM20
CAR20
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
PUSH-BUTTONS WITH LIGHT (24 VAC).
3-POLES CONTACTOR (12 VDC).
3-POLE MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC SWITCH 4
A, CURVE C.
DIODES AND THYRISTORS.
1
1
1
1
8
AI6/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - DC MOTOR STARTER
10
9
AI6/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - DC MOTOR STARTER. (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
10
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
11
MUAD
1
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
12
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
13
0420PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
14
0420PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
15
0420IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
16
0420CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
17
0420TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
18
0420MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0433-430/10S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0433-431/10S
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
LIELBA .
"INDUSTRIAL " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
AI2
APPLICATION - STARTER THROUGH AUTOTRANSFORMER,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
3-POLE MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC SWITCH 4
A, CURVE C.
NETWORK ANALYZER.
PUSH-BUTTONS WITH LIGHT (24 VAC).
THERMAL RELAY (1.6 - 2.5 A).
TIME RELAY (0.6 - 60 SEC.).
3-PHASE AUTO-TRANSFORMER.
MOTOR (EMT7) (SQUIRREL CAGE).
ALI01
ALI03
CON01
IAM20
MED60
PUL04
REL02
REL11
TRA14
VAR02
QTY.
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
AI2/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - STARTER THROUGH AUTOTRANSFORMER
10
3
AI2/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - STARTER THROUGH AUTOTRANSFORMER. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
4
AI5
APPLICATION - AC WOUND ROTOR MOTOR
STARTER,INCLUYE:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
MOTOR (EMT8) (WOUND MOTOR).
AC STARTING RHEOSTAT.
3-POLE MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC SWITCH 4
A, CURVE C.
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
PUSH-BUTTONS WITH LIGHT (24 VAC).
1
ALI01
ALI03
VAR06
CAR22
IAM20
CON01
PUL04
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
AI5/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - AC WOUND ROTOR MOTOR STARTER
10
6
AI5/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - AC WOUND ROTOR MOTOR STARTER.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
AI8
APPLICATION - REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION
(POWER FACTOR CORRECTION),INCLUDED:
DOMESTIC MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD, 150 OHM, 500 W.
CAPACITIVE LOAD 4 X 7 MF.
INDUCTIVE LOAD 0-33-78-140-193-236 MH.
NETWORK ANALYZER.
1
ALI02
CAR04
CAR09
CAR12
MED60
8
AI8/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - REACTIVE POWER COMPENSATION
(POWER FACTOR CORRECTION)
1
1
1
2
1
10
Ref: 0433-431/10S
ITEM
9
10
REFERENCE
2 / 3
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
AI8/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST INDIRECT
ELECTRICAL CONTACTS IN TT NEUTRAL REGIMEN
10
AI9
PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST INDIRECT ELECTRICAL
CONTACTS IN TT NEUTRAL REGIMEN,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
DOUBLE VARIABLE RESISTIVE LOAD, 150 OHM,
500 W.
COMMUTATOR/SWITCH.
2 DOUBLE PUSH-BUTTONS (230 VAC).
3-PHASE CURRENT TRANSFORMER.
3-POLE + NEUTRAL DIFFERENTIAL AUTOMATIC
SWITCH, 25 A, 300 MA, CLASS AC,
INSTANTANEOUS.
1
ALI01
CAR05
COM12
PUL11
TRA12
IAD13
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
AI9/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL CONTACTS IN TT NEUTRAL
REGIMEN
10
12
AI9/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL CONTACTS IN TT NEUTRAL
REGIMEN
10
13
AI10
PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST INDIRECT ELECTRICAL
CONTACTS IN TN NEUTRAL REGIMEN,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
COMMUTATOR/SWITCH.
3-PHASE CURRENT TRANSFORMER.
1-POLE + NEUTRAL DIFFERENTIAL AUTOMATIC
SWITCH, 6 A, 30 MA, CLASS A.
1
ALI01
COM12
TRA12
IAD01
1
1
1
1
14
AI10/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL CONTACTS IN TN NEUTRAL
REGIMEN
10
15
AI10/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL CONTACTS IN TN NEUTRAL
REGIMEN
10
16
AI11
PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST INDIRECT ELECTRICAL
CONTACTS IN IT NEUTRAL REGIMEN,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
1-POLE LOAD SWITCH.
2-POLE LOAD SWITCH.
ISOLATION PERMANENT CONTROLLER
1
ALI01
INT01
INT02
CPA
1
2
2
1
17
AI11/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL CONTACTS IN IT NEUTRAL
REGIMEN
10
18
AI11/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - PEOPLE SAFETY AGAINST
INDIRECT ELECTRICAL CONTACTS IN IT NEUTRAL
REGIMEN
10
19
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
Ref: 0433-431/10S
ITEM
20
3 / 3
REFERENCE
MUAD
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
1
21
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
22
0421PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
23
0421PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
24
0421IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
25
0421CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
26
0421TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
27
0421MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRIC INSTALLATIONS (10 CAI + CAL)
Ref: 0433-432/10S
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
1 / 3
DESCRIPTION
LIELBA .
"INDUSTRIAL " ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
INTEGRATED LABORATORY, FORMED BY:
AI3
APPLICATION - SPEED COMMUTATOR FOR
DAHLANDER MOTOR,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
3-POLE MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC SWITCH 4
A, CURVE C.
NETWORK ANALYZER.
PUSH-BUTTONS WITH LIGHT (24 VAC).
THERMAL RELAY (1.6 - 2.5 A).
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
TIME RELAY (0.6 - 60 SEC.).
MOTOR (EMT9) (DAHLANDER MOTOR).
ALI01
CON01
IAM20
MED60
PUL04
REL02
ALI03
REL11
VAR03
QTY.
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
AI3/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - SPEED COMMUTATOR FOR
DAHLANDER MOTOR
10
3
AI3/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - SPEED COMMUTATOR FOR
DAHLANDER MOTOR. (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
10
4
AI7
APPLICATION - AUTOMATIC CHANGE OF SPEED OF
A DAHLANDER MOTOR WITH CHANGE OF
DIRECTION,INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
3-POLE + NEUTRAL MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC
SWITCH 6 A, CURVE C.
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
THERMAL RELAY / 3-POLE PHASE FAULT (0.8 1.2 A).
PUSH-BUTTON FOR INDUSTRIAL USE.
MOTOR (EMT9) (DAHLANDER MOTOR).
1
ALI01
IAM24
CON01
REL05
PUL16
VAR03
1
1
5
1
5
1
5
AI7/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - AUTOMATIC CHANGE OF SPEED OF
A DAHLANDER MOTOR WITH CHANGE OF DIRECTION
10
6
AI7/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - AUTOMATIC CHANGE OF SPEED OF
A DAHLANDER MOTOR WITH CHANGE OF DIRECTION.
(RESULTS CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
10
7
AI12
ALI01
ALI03
PUL48
LAM02
CON01
VAR09
REL30
REL47
MODULAR TRAINER(AC MOTORS),INCLUDED:
INDUSTRIAL MAIN POWER SUPPLY.
AC AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY (24 VAC).
3 DOBLE CHAMBER PUSH - BUTTONS (2 UNITS)
AUXILIARY LAMPS.
3-POLES CONTACTOR (24 VAC).
FRECUENCY VARIATOR.
SYNCHRONIZATION RELAY.
THERMAL RELAY (GV PROTECTOR MODULE(2 UNITS)
1
1
1
2
1
4
1
1
2
Ref: 0433-432/10S
ITEM
7
2 / 3
REFERENCE
REL45
IAM31
FUS10
TRA06
CAR10
VAR02
VAR03
VAR15
DESCRIPTION
MODULE WITH DISJUNCTOR
4-POLE MAGNETO-THERMAL AUTOMATIC SWITCH 4
A, CURVE C.
MODULE WITH 3 FUSE - HOLDERS AND POWER FUSES
3-PHASE POWER TRANSFORMER (CUSTOM MADE).
CAPACITIVE LOAD (CUSTOM MADE).
MOTOR (EMT7) (SQUIRREL CAGE).
MOTOR (EMT9) (DAHLANDER MOTOR).
SINGLE-PHASE MOTOR OF CAPACITOR
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
AI12/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - MODULAR TRAINER(AC MOTORS)
10
9
AI12/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - MODULAR TRAINER(AC MOTORS)
10
10
AI13
ALI10
CAR30
CAR31
LAM26
VAR18
LAM09
MED65
CAR32
CAR33
MODULAR TRAINER FOR ELECTROTECNICS,INCLUDED:
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
INDUCTANCES MODULE
CAPACITORS MODULE
LIGHTING MODULE
ELECTROSTATIC KIT
FLUORESCENT LAMP.
DIGITAL MULTIMETER.
RECTIFIER DIODES MODULE
RESISTIVE COMPONENTS MODULE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
AI13/SOF*
COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUCTION SOFTWARE OF THE
APPLICATION - MODULAR TRAINER FOR
ELECTROTECNICS
10
12
AI13/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR THE
APPLICATION - MODULAR TRAINER FOR
ELECTROTECNICS
10
13
INS/SOF
CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE PACKAGE
(TEACHER'S SOFTWARE)
1
14
CABD
CABLES KIT
1
15
MUAD
1
EPIB
DAB
MUAD/SOF
ELECTRIC POWER DATA ACQUISITION
SYSTEM,INCLUDED:
ELECTRIC POWER INTERFACE BOX
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
DATA ACQUISITION SOFTWARE
1
1
1
16
0422PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
17
0422PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
18
0422IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
19
0422CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
20
0422TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
21
0422MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0433-432/10S
3 / 3
* Each Software Package contains the following parts: Theory, Exercises,
Guided Practices, Self-evaluation (exam), Video and Statistical analysis.
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module is for 10 students post, but we can recommend the number of
units for 20 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions included:
a) Technical conditions:
- Laboratories adaptation.
- Installation of all units supplied.
- Starting up for all units.
- Training about the exercises to be done any unit.
- Teacher training related with the teaching unit and the
teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
1
APPLICATIONS
Frame
2
(applications support)
(AD1A)
(AI1)
(BASB)
Modules automatic
anchorage system
High Safety
(AD3A)
APPLICATIONS
Automatic earth
connection system
(AI2)
Sight of the frame with some modules
allocated
or
(BASS)
(AD5)
(AI4)
(AI5)
(AD6A)
3
4.- Electricity
Sight of the frame
with some modules allocated
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System
Teaching
Technique
used
(AD8)
INS/SOF.
(AE7)
Teacher Software
EMT../SOF.
Student/Module Software
(AD9A)
4
(AE8)
MUAD. Electric Power Data Acquisition System
Teaching
Technique
used
EPIB. Electric power
interface box
(AD13)
(AE9)
DAB. Data adquisition board
MUAD/SOF. Power Data
acquisition System
5
Manuals
Other APPLICATIONS
TOTALLY
SAFETY SYSTEM
Other APPLICATIONS
The complete laboratory includes part 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 ,and any part can be supplied individually or additionally.
Minimum supply: Frame (BASB or BASS) + one Application + Manuals.
Available Applications:
! Domestic Electric Installations:
AD1A. Robbery alarm station.
AD3A. Fire alarm station.
AD5. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A. Luminosity control station.
AD8. Blinds activator.
AD9A. Heating control station.
AD11A. Network analyzer.
AD13. Audio door entry system.
AD14. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A. Position control station.
AD17A. Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24. Position Switch.
AD19A. Sound station.
AD22. Flooding control station.
AD23. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A. C o n t r o l s t a t i o n f o r
domestic electric services
through the telephone.
AD28A. Integral control station of
domestic electric systems.
AD30. Gas control station.
AD31. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
! Industrial Electric Installations:
AI1. Star-delta starter.
AI2. S t a r t e r t h r o u g h a u t o transformer.
AI3. Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4. Starter-inverter.
AI5. AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6. DC motor starter.
AI7. Automatic change of speed
of a Dahlander motor with
change of direction.
AI8. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical contacts
in TT neutral regimen.
AI10. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11. People safety against indirect electrical
contacts in IT neutral regimen.
AI12. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1. Aerial line model.
AE2. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3. Test unit for magneto-thermal automatic
switches.
AE4. Test unit for differential automatic switches.
AE5. Relay control station.
AE6. Energy counters control station.
AE7. Multi-functional electrical protection
station.
AE8. Power & torque measurements of
electrical motors.
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth fault detection.
Directional power flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 37
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
1
(continuation)
(continuation)
Frame
Applications support. There are two options to chose:
BAS-B. Basic Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Possibility of housing up to 10 different modules.
Automatic anchorage system for any module.
Automatic earth connection system.
or
BASS. Double Frame
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Double frame, single side working post.
Anodized aluminium structure and modular building.
Dimensions approx.:1300mm x 800mm x 700mm.
Possibility of housing until 12 different modules at the same
time. Transparent internal separation. Automatic anchorage
system for any module. Automatic earth connection system.
Dimensions: 1300x800x700mm. approx. Weight:
2
Applications
Main features:
Painted steel modules. All modules have handles and diagram. Automatic anchorage system for housing the modules in the frame. Automatic earth connection in the
modules. Safety connections. Safety wires.
There is a manual for each application (8 manuals normally supplied).
Domestic Electrical Installations
AD1A. Robbery Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET27. Glass Break Detector.
INT32. Intrusion Switch/Detector with Relay 1000W. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
VAR07. Kit: Burglar Alarm Central + infrared ele. + battery.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with intrusion detector and alarm.
2.- Assembly of the station with glass breaking detector and
alarm.
3.- Assembly of the station with both types of detectors and alarm.
4.- Assembly of the station with infrared detectors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD1A.pdf
AD3A. Fire Alarm Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALA02. Fire Alarm Station (with battery).
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET21. Fire Detector through Ionization for Central.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET22. Fire Thermal Detector.
SEL17. Fire Indicators, Bell type.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with fire detector, smoke detector and
alarm.
2.- Test of the station with fire detector.
3.- Test of the station with smoke detector.
4.- Test of the station with detection of fire by the thermal detector.
5.- Activation of the electro-valve following the detection of the
fire.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD5. Temporization of Stairs
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
CTI10. Automatic of Stairs.
INT21. Switch+Commutator Group+Bell Push-Button.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM13. 2 Low Consumption Fluorescent Lamps. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the basic set of temporization.
2.- Test of the set from two points with incandescent lamps.
3.- Test of the set from two points with fluorescent lamps.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD5.pdf
AD6A. Luminosity Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
REG06. Voltage Electronic Regulator (Switch) 40 to 300W/230Vac.
INT18. 1-pole Switch + 1-pole Switch with Light.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD6A.pdf
Page 38
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.-
Assembly of the control station.
Control of luminosity of an halogen lamp.
Control of luminosity of an incandescent lamp.
Test of the station by movement sensor.
Luminosity control.
Complete control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD8. Blinds Activator
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT22. 2 Switches for Blinds.
DET19. Twilight Detector.
DET20. Light Detector.
VAR01. Motor for Blinds / Curtains.
PUL29. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (without Interlock).
PUL30. 2 Push-Buttons Group for Blinds (with Interlock).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the activator (motor, detectors and switches).
2.- Blind activation by pulsators (push-buttons).
3.- Blind activation by sensors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD9A. Heating Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
MED76. Thermostat for Heating.
MED77. Thermostat for Heating and Refrigeration.
SEL09. 2 Double Luminous Signalling red-green 230Vac. (2 units).
TIM01. 2 Bell 70dB,230V. (2 units).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the heating control station.
2.- Assembly of the heating and refrigeration control.
3.- Test with several temperatures.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
MED11. AC Ammeter (0-10A).
MED25. Pointer Frequency Meter(45-65Hz).
MED32. 1-Phase Wattmeter 230V.
MED21. AC Voltmeter (0-250V).
MED30. 1-Phase Phasemeter 230V.
MED38. 1-Phase Varmeter 230V.
MED12. AC Ammeter (custom made). (3 units).
MED22. AC Voltmeter (0-400V). (3 units).
MED31. 3-Phase Phasemeter 400V. (3 units).
MED39. 3-Phase Balanced Varmeter 440V.
MED33. 3-Phase Balanced Wattmeter 440V.
MED63. Synchronoscope.
MED64. Phase Sequence Indicator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 220V single-phase circuit.
2.- Assembly of the analyzer to measure current, voltage,
frequency, active power, reactive power, sequence of phases
of a 380V three-phase circuit.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD13. Audio Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR01. Phones Power Supply.
POR02. Phone.
POR03. Interphone.
POR06. Lock.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check the interphone operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD14. Audio and Video Door Entry System
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
POR06. Lock.
POR05. Phone/Monitor.
POR04. Video Camera.
POR07. Digital Station.
POR08. Video-Interphone Power Supply.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the system.
2.- To check of the video and audio operation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD14.pdf
AD15A. Position Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
INT14. 1-pole 2 Switches.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
SEN04. Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor type PNP.
SEN14. AC Cylindrical Capacitive Proximity Sensor.
SEN29. AC Cylindrical Inductive Proximity Sensor.
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-Switch.
SEN26. Presence and Movement Sensor (Wall).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the station with sensors.
Test of the capacitive detection of a body.
Test of the inductive position detection of a body.
Assembly of the station with presence and movement wall
sensor.
5.- To check the movement detection of a body.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD17A. Photoelectric Control Position Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
LAM04. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (24Vac). (2 units).
SEN18. Cylindrical Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN19. Miniature Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN20. Compact Photoelectric Sensor.
SEN21. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN22. Barrier Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
SEN23. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Emitter).
SEN24. Reflecting Photoelectric Sensor (Receptor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Assembly of the control station.
Test of the detection with cylindrical sensor.
Test of the detection with miniature sensor.
Test of the detection with compact sensor.
Assembly of the control station with battery and sensors.
Test of the detection with emitters and receivers.
Test with only emitters and receptors.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 39
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
AD11A. Network Analyzer
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
AD24. Position Switch
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply.
LAM03. 3 Push-buttons and Lamps (220Vac).
SEN01. Instantaneous Micro-switch.
SEN02. MBB Micro-switch.
SEN03. BBM Micro-switch.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Instantaneous Micro-switch.
2.- MBB Micro-switch.
3.- BBM Micro-switch.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD19A. Sound Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
AUD01. Analog Sound Regulator.
AUD04. Speaker of 2”, 2W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD06. Basic Audio Central.
AUD20. Analog Sound Regulator (mono-stereo).
AUD02. Digital Sound Regulator.
AUD05. Speaker of 4”, 7W, 8 ohm. (3 units).
AUD03. Warnings Emitter Module.
AUD08. Background Music Regulator 3W.
AUD10. Double Background Music Regulator.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Mono-stereo system installation.
Mono system with warnings reception.
Mono-stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Stereo system installation with warnings reception.
Background Music installation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD22. Flooding Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET11. Probe for Water Electro-valve. (2 units).
SEL03. 3 Pilot-Lights.
SEL21. Indoor Siren.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the flooding control with a probe.
2.- Test of the flooding control.
3.- Test of the flooding control acting on an eletro-valve.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD23. Wireless Basic Control Station (RF)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
SEL01. Light Signalling Beacons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Wireless intrusion detection and alarm.
2.- Wireless panic button alarm.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD25A. Control Station for Domestic Electric Services through the Telephone
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR01. Basic Control Module.
DET01. Flooding Detector.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector). (3units).
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET13. Wireless Intrusion Detector RF.
DET14. Wireless Panic Push-button RF.
DET15. Wireless 1-channel Receptor RF.
VAR05. Tones Dialling Telephone.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Smoke detection.
Gas detection and electro-valve control.
Flooding detection and electro-valve control.
Temperature and Battery.
Intrusion detection.
Wireless detection.
Complete control of home electric services through the
telephone.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD28A. Integral Control Station of Domestic Electric Systems
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CTR02. Advanced Control Module.
CTR05. Power Module 72W.
CTR07. Timers Module.
CTR08. Inputs Module 24V.
CTR11. Outputs Module 24V.
CTR17. Infrared Remote Control for Control Modules.
CTR18. Infrared Receptor.
DET04. Flooding Detector (with probe).
DET05. Gas Detector for domestic control.
DET06. Smoke Detector for domestic control.
DET09. Intrusion Detector for domestic control.
DET10. Water Electro-valve.
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
VAR08. Monitor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AD28A.pdf
Page 40
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the complete system with
the smoke,
flooding and gas detectors.
2.- Test of the station with smoke, flooding and gas
detectors.
3.- To set the temporization and monitoring the results.
4.- Assembly of the complete system with infrared and
instrusion detectors.
5.- Test of the station with infrared and instrusion
detectors.
6.- Electro-valves activation.
7.- Wireless assembly of the sensor through infrared
control.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
AD30. Gas Control Station
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Domestic Electrical Installations (continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
DET12. Gas Electro-valve.
DET03. Fitted Power Supply (gas and flooding detector).
DET02. Gas Detector.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Gas detection.
2.- Electro-valve activation.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD31. Movement and Sound Detection and Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
INT15. 2 Switches with Light.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W.
INT31. Intrusion Switch/Detector from 40 to 300W.
LAM10. 2 Halogen Lamps.
PUL22. 2 Light Push-Buttons.
TIM05. Bell + Buzzer.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Movement and sound detection controlled by switches.
2.- Movement and sound detection controlled by pulsators.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
MED04. DC Milliammeter (0-600 mA).
MED05. DC Ammeter (0-1.5A).
MED08. AC Milliammeter (0-600mA).
MED09. AC Ammeter (0-2.5A).
MED15. DC Voltmeter (0-5V).
MED16. DC Voltmeter (0-50V).
MED19. AC Voltmeter (0-10V).
MED20. AC Voltmeter (0-60V).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
4.- Electricity
AD32. 24vac/12vdc Circuits Analyzer
1.- AC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
2.- DC circuits analyzer (2 ranges).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AD33. Installations Faults Simulator
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02. Domestic Main Power Supply.
COM14. 2 Commutators (2 units).
ENC09. 2-pole European Socket with Safety Device.(2 units).
COM21.Inverter + Group of 2 Commutators. (2 units).
LAM01. Lamps.
LAM08. 2 Lamp-holders + Incandescent Lamps 40W. (2 units).
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp.
MED65. Digital Multimeter.
FUS04. 3 Fuse-holders 10A, 230Vac (include 2, 4,6,10A).
Fault box.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.-
Ground fault simulation of a plug base.
Fault simulation between phases of a plug base.
Ground fault simulation of an incandescent lamp base.
Ground fault simulation of a fluorescent lamp base.
Fault simulation between phases of an incandescent lamp
base.
To simulate fault of power-supply contact in the lamp base.
To simulate fault of contact of the switch.
To simulate fault of contact of the fuse.
To simulate fault of contact of the fluorescent base.
Industrial Electrical Installations
AI1. Star-Delta Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac. (3 units)).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the starter.
Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
Measurement of the star current and delta current.
Direct start of the motor. Measurement of the starting current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI2 Starter through Auto-transformer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
TRA14. 3-Phase Auto-transformer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- Test of the starter with a squirrel cage motor.
3.- Measurement of both the star and delta current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI3. Speed Commutator for Dahlander Motor
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (3 units).
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
REL02. Thermal Relay (1.6-2.5A).
REL11. Time Relay (0.6-60 sec.).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the commutator.
2.- Test of the commutator changing the speed of a Dahlander
motor.
3.- Measurement of the voltage and current.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 41
www.edibon.com
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications (continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI4. Starter-Inverter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
CON11. 3-pole Contactor- Inverter (220Vac).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
PUL03. Push-Buttons with Light (220Vac).(2 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test of the direct start of a squirrel cage motor.
3.- To invert the rotation direction of the motor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI5. AC Wound Rotor Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
VAR06. Motor (EMT8) (wound rotor).
CAR22. AC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the starter.
2.- To test the starter changing the resistances step by step.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
4.- Electricity
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI6. DC Motor Starter
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI04. DC Auxiliary Power Supply (+12, 0, -12 Vdc).
VAR04. Motor (EMT5) (DC motor).
CAR23. DC Starting Rheostat.
IAM20. 3-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 4A, Curve C.
CON03. 3-pole Contactor (12Vdc).
PUL04. Push-Buttons with Light (24Vac).
CAR20. Diodes and Thyristors.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starter.
2.- Starter rheostat.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI7. Automatic Change of Speed of a Dahlander Motor with Change of Direction
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAM24. 3-pole+neutral Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 6A,
Curve C.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (5 units).
REL05. Thermal Relay/3-pole Phase fault (0.8-1.2A). (2 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NC Contacts). (5 units).
PUL16. Push-Button for Industrial use (NO Contacts). (5 units).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set.
2.- Motor starting with right turning direction at high speed. R.p.m
and consumption measurements.
3.- Motor stop and change to left the turning direction at high
speed.
4.- Change to low speed.
5.- Motor stop and change to right the turning direction.
6.- Change to high speed. R.p.m and consumption
measurements.
AI8. Reactive Power Compensation (Power Factor Correction)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI02.
Domestic Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load,150 ohm, 500W.
CAR09. Capacitive Load 4 x 7 mF.
CAR12. Inductive Load 0-33-78-140-193-236 mH. (2 units).
MED60B.Network Analyzer with active and reactive energy counters.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AI8.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.-
Measurement of active power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of apparent power consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of power factor of a receiver.
Measurement of active energy consumed by a receiver.
Measurement of reactive energy consumed by a receiver.
Compensation of reactive energy (improvement of the power
factor).
8.- Comparison of the active energy consumed after the
compensation.
9.- Comparison of the reactive energy consumed after the
compensation.
10.-Measurement of power factor after the compensation.
AI9. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR05. Double Variable Resistive Load , 150 ohm, 500 W.
Resistance 1600 W.
COM12.Commutator/Switch.
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD13. 3-pole + neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 25A,
300mA, class AC, instantaneous.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Study of an isolation fault in TT neutral regimen.
2.- Structure of a differential switch. Necessity to use a differential
switch.
3.- Study of the selectivity among differential switches.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AI10. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in TN Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
COM12.Commutator/Switch. (2 units).
TRA12. 3-Phase Current Transformer.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
Resistance 200 W.
Resistance 100 W, 72W.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 42
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Study of an isolation fault in TN neutral regimen.
Measurement of the ground loop impedances.
Indirect contact with defect mass.
The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-C conditions.
5.- The case in which the automatic switches are not suitable in
TN-S conditions.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Industrial Electrical Installations (continuation)
AI11. People Safety against Indirect Electrical Contacts in IT Neutral Regimen
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
INT01. 1-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
INT02. 2-pole Load Switch. (2 units).
CPA.
Isolation Permanent Controller.
Capacitor 300V. 200 nF .(2 units).
Resistance 100 W.
Resistance 10 W.
2.- Study of an isolation double fault
(only with one mass).
More information in:
4.- Operation of the isolation controller.
1.- Study of an isolation simple fault.
5.- Study of the ground loop impedance.
3.- Study with several masses.
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
A12. Modular Trainer (AC Motors)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI12.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through contactor, with some
stop and start push-buttons.
2.- Configuration of a magnetic
protection system, with stop mush
room button.
3.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with a switch.
4.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor through impulses contactor.
5.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with pushbuttons and signalling.
6.- Direct starting of a three-phase
motor by GV protector with two
boxes of push-buttons and
signalling.
7.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor stopping before turning
in the opposite direction.
8.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor without stopping before
turning in the opposite direction.
9.- Turning inverted starter of a three-
phase motor with microswitch and
push-buttons box.
10.- Star-delta starting with an turn
inverter of a three-phase motor.
11.- Automatic star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
12.- Turning inverted starter of a threephase motor with microswitch, with
start push-buttons, stop and
function cycle. (Direct).
13.- Manual star-delta starting of a
three-phase motor.
14.- Control of a single phase motor
direct and, with time-delay
connection and disconnection.
15.- Starting of a three-phase motor with
single- phase voltage.
16.- Motor speed control with a variator.
17.-Parameters of the motor through
software.
18.-Control of a two-speeds Dahlander
motor.
AI13. Modular Trainer for Electrotecnics
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI10. Power Supply Module
CAR30. Inductances Module
CAR31. Capacitors Module
CAR32. Rectifier Diodes Module
CAR33 .Resistive Components Module
LAM09. Fluorescent Lamp
LAM26. Lighting Module
MED65.Digital Multimeter
REL50. Relays Module.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage)
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
TRA28. Three-phase transformer
VAR16. Electromagnetism Kits with group of
motor/generator
VAR17. Dismantled transformer kit
VAR18. Electrostatic kit
VAR25. Open Universal Motor.
More information in:
www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/electricity/basic/AI13.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Estatic Electricity:
1.- Static electricity checking,with an
electroscope and anelectrometer.
2.- Static electricity experiments.
Direct current (DC) and Alternating Current
(AC):
3.- Ohm´s law verification.
4.- Installation of the resistive components
module.
5.- Total resistance of a circuit in series.
6. Resistance of a circuit in parallel.
7.- Power measurement of a resistive
circuit.
8.- Total resistance of a circuit in series/in
parallel.
9.- Connection of lamps in series.
10.-Lamps in parallel.
11.-Analysis of the variable resistances
response curve.
12.-Voltage divider analysis.
13.-Lamp with variable lighting.
14.-Simplification systems: Application of
Kirchhoff´s first law. Application of
Kirchhoff´s second law. Thevenin´s
and Norton´s Theorem.
15.-Application of the superposition
theorem.
16.-Resistive circuits in delta.
17.-Measurement and visualization of the
alternating current.
18.-Measurement of the phase angle
among voltages (AC).
Dynamic Electricity:
19.- Identification of the components of the
trainer.
20.-Preparation of the power supply and of
the measurement instruments
Electric capacity:
21.-Load and unload analysis of a
capacitor.
Magnetism, Electromagnetism and
Electromagnetic induction:
22.-Electromagnetic Induction.
23.-Electromagnetic Induction.
24.- Electromagnet: Oersted's experiment.
25.- The electromagnetic field (Electromagnets).
Motors:
26.-Electric motors
27.-Generators.
Page 43
28.-Identification, coils measurement
and starting-up of a single-phase
motor.
29.-Identification, measurement and
starting-up of an universal motor.
30.-Identification, coils measuremt and
starting-up of a three phase motor.
Transformers:
31.-Experiments and practices with a
dismantled transformer.
32.-Identification of the three-phase
transformer.
33.-Connection as single-phase
transformer.
34.-Star/star three-phase connection.
35.-Reverse star/star three-phase
connection .
36.-Direct delta/delta three-phase
connection.
37.-Star/delta three-phase connection.
38.-Three-phase/six-phase connection.
39.-Transformer with coils in series in
phase.
RL, RC and RCL Circuits:
40.-Analysis of a RL circuit in series.
41.-Analysis of a RL circuit in parallel.
42.-Analysis of a RC circuit in series.
43.-Analysis of a RC circuit in parallel.
44.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in series.
45.-Analysis of a RLC circuit in parallel.
Rectification and filtrate:
46.-Analysis of the rectifier diode
response curve.
47.-Half wave rectification .
48.-Rectification to feed the universal
motor.
49.-Double wave rectification with two
windings.
50.-Double wave with a Graezt's bridge.
51.-Half wave three-phase rectification.
52.-Three-phase rectification in bridge.
Electric circuits:
53.-Basic electric installation with lamps.
54.-Lamps controlled from two points
and from three points.
55.-Lamps control by a switch relay.
56.-Lamps control by a commutato relay.
57.-Installation of a fluorescent tube
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
PUL48. 3 Double Chamber Push-buttons. (2
units).
LAM02. Auxiliary Lamps(3 lamps.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac). (4 units).
VAR09. Frequency variator.
REL30. Synchronization Relay (variable delay).
REL47. Thermal relay (GV protector) module
(2 units).
REL45. Module with disjunctor.
IAM31. 4-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic
Switch,4A,Curve C
FUS10. Module with 3 fuse-holders and power
fuses.
TRA06. 3-Phase Power Transformer (custom
made).
CAR10. Capacitive Load (custom made).
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
VAR03. Motor (EMT9) (Dahlander motor).
VAR15. Single-phase motor of capacitor.
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
2
(continuation)
(continuation)
Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations
AE1. Aerial Line Model
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
TRA05. 3-Phase Power Transformer 220/127V, 1000VA.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
TRA18. Petersen Coil.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.5.-
Assembly of the set.
Measurement of the voltage without loads.
Measurement of the voltage with loads.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
Fault to earth and measurement of the current through the
Petersen coil.
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set with inductive load.
Power Factor (cos j) measurement.
To calculate the necessary capacitors to get cos j= 1.
Capacitors connection and power factor measurement.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE1.pdf
AE2. Reactive Energy Control and Compensation
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CAR14. 3-phase Inductive Load.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE2.pdf
AE3. Test Unit for Magneto-thermal Automatic Switches
4.- Electricity
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
IAM13. 2-pole Magneto-thermal Automatic Switch, 1A, Curve C.
TRA19. Transformer for Experiments (custom made).
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the set.
2.- To simulate a high current (thermal) and to test if the automatic
switch breaks.
3.- To measure the current and to check the tripping.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE4. Test Unit for Differential Automatic Switches
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
IAD01. 1-pole+neutral Differential Automatic Switch, 6A, 30mA,
class A.
CAR04. Variable Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500W.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To simulate a fault to earth and to test if the differential breaks.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE5. Relay Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
REL23. Overcurrent Relay and Fault to Earth.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
CAR18. Aerial Line Model.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To connect the transformers to line.
2.- To connect the protection relay.
3.- To simulate a line fault and the relay will trip the circuit breaker.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE6. Energy Counters Control Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR01. Fixed Resistive Load, 150 ohm, 500 W.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
MED72. Energy Counter.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the voltage and current transformers.
2.- To measure the energy consumed by the load with the energy
counter.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/AE6.pdf
AE7. Multi-Functional Electrical Protection Station
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CAR11. 3-phase Capacitive Load.
CON01. 3-pole Contactor (24Vac).
REL22. Multi-function Protection Relay ( software included).
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the station with the relay.
2.- To simulate faults in the line.
3.- To simulate under and/or overvoltage, changing the line
parameters.
4.- To check if the relay trips the contactor.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
AE8. Power & Torque Measurements of Electrical Motors
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
ALI03. AC Auxiliary Power Supply (24Vac).
CON02. 3-pole Contactor (220Vac).
PUL11. 2 Double Push-Buttons (230Vac).
REL08. Time Electronic Relay against Overcurrents (0.3-1.5A).
MED60. Network Analyzer.
VAR02. Motor (EMT7) (squirrel cage).
FREND. Dynamo Brake.
TECNEL/T. Tachodynamo.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 44
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Assembly of the set and to start the motor and dynamo.
2.- To change the dynamo current and to measure both the power
and the torque of the motor.
3.- To obtain the efficiency curve.
4.1- Basic Electricity
(continuation)
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory: (continuation)
2 Applications
(continuation)
Energy Installations (continuation)
AE9. Directional Relay: Earth Fault Detection. Directional Power Flow Detection. Reactive Power Flow Detection
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Included Modules:
ALI01. Industrial Main Power Supply.
CAR08. 3-Phase Variable Resistive Load (custom made).
CON01. 3-Pole Contactor (24Vac).
CAR11. 3-Phase Capacitive Load.
TRA04. 3-Phase Power Transformer 380/220V, 630VA.
REL20. 1-Phase Directional Relay.
CAR14. 3-Phase Inductive Load.
TRA10. Current Transformer 25/5A.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.2.3.4.-
Assembly of the set.
Directional relay tripping test, in a case of an earth fault.
To test the tripping when power flows in the opposite direction.
To test the tripping when the reactive power is over or under
certain limit.
More information in: http://www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Software
CAI. Computer Aided Instruction Software System:
With no physical connection between application/ module and computer, this
complete package consists on an Instructor Software (INS/SOF) totally integrated with
the Student/Application Software (A.../SOF). Both are interconnected so that the
teacher knows at any moment what is the theoretical and practical knowledge of the
students. These, on the other hand, get a virtual instructor who helps them to deal with
all the information on the subject of study.
+
Application
(several modules)
Instructor
Software
Student/Application
Software
With the INS/SOF. Classroom Management Software Package (Instructor
Software), the Teacher has a whole range of options, among them:
- Organize Students by Classes and Groups.
- Create easily new entries or delete them.
- Create data bases with student information.
- Analyze results and make statistical comparisons.
- Print reports.
- Develop own examinations.
- Detect student’s progress and difficulties.
...and many other facilities.
The Instructor Software is the same for all the applications, and working in network
configuration, allows controlling all the students in the classroom.
A.../SOF. Computer Aided Instruction Software Packages (Student/Application
Software).
It explains how to use the applications, run the experiments and what to do at any
moment.
Each application has its own Student Software package.
- The options are presented by pull-down menus and pop-up windows.
- Each Software Package contains:
Theory: that gives the student the theoretical background for a total
understanding of the studied subject.
Exercises: divided by thematic areas and chapters to check out that the theory has
been understood.
Guided Practices: presents several practices to be done, alongside the
applications, showing how to complete the exercises and practices.
Exams: set of questions presented to test the obtained knowledge.
Available Student/Applications Software Packages:
! Domestic Electrical Installations:
AD1A/SOF. Robbery alarm Station.
AD3A/SOF. Fire alarm station.
AD5/SOF. Temporization of stairs.
AD6A/SOF. L u m i n o s i t y c o n t r o l
station.
AD8/SOF. Blinds activator.
AD9A/SOF. Heating control station.
AD11A/SOF. Network analyzer.
AD13/SOF. A u d i o d o o r e n t r y
system.
AD14/SOF. Audio and video door
entry system.
AD15A/SOF. Position control station.
AD17A/SOF.Photoelectric control
position station.
AD24/SOF. Position Switch.
AD19A/SOF.Sound station.
AD22/SOF. Flooding control station.
AD23/SOF. Wireless basic control
station (RF).
AD25A/SOF.Control station for domestic
electric services through the
telephone.
AD28A/SOF.Integral control station of
domesticelectric systems.
AD30/SOF. Gas control station.
AD31/SOF. Movement and sound
detection and control.
AD32/SOF. 24 Vac / 12 Vdc circuits
analyzer.
AD33/SOF. I n s t a l l a t i o n s f a u l t s
simulator.
Industrial Electrical Installations:
AI1/SOF.
Star-delta starter.
AI2/SOF.
Starter through autotransformer.
AI3/SOF.
Speed commutator for
Dahlander motor.
AI4/SOF.
Starter-inverter.
AI5/SOF.
AC wound rotor motor
starter.
AI6/SOF. DC motor starter.
AI7/SOF. A u t o m a t i c c h a n g e o f
speed of a Dahlander
motor with change of
direction.
AI8/SOF. R e a c t i v e p o w e r c o m pensation (Power factor
correction).
AI9/SOF. Pe o p l e s a f e t y a g a i n s t
indirect electrical c o n t a c t s
inTT neutral regimen.
AI10/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in TN
neutral regimen.
AI11/SOF. People safety against indirect
electrical contacts in IT neutral
regimen.
AI12/SOF. Modular Trainer(AC motors).
AI13/SOF. M o d u l a r Tr a i n e r f o r
Electrotecnics.
! Energy Installations:
AE1/SOF. Aerial line model.
AE2/SOF. Reactive energy control and
compensation.
AE3/SOF. Test unit for magneto-thermal
automaticswitches.
AE4/SOF. Test unit for differential
automatic switches.
AE5/SOF. Relay control station.
AE6/SOF. Energy counters control
station.
AE7/SOF. Multi-functional electrical
protection station.
AE8/SOF. Power & torque measurements
of electrical motors.
AE9/SOF. Directional Relay: Earth fault
detection. Directional power
flow detection. Reactive
power flow detection.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 45
www.edibon.com
4.- Electricity
3
4.1- Basic Electricity
LIELBA. Electrical Installations Integrated Laboratory:
(continuation)
(continuation)
Data Acquisition
4
Connections
points
Data acquisition
software
(MUAD/SOF)
3
4
“n”
Application
Electric power
interface box
(EPIB)
Cable to
computer
(DAB)
Cables to
interface
2
MUAD. Power Data Acquisition System
Data acquisition
board
1
4
Student
post
MUAD is the perfect link between the applications/modules and the PC. MUAD is
a continuous data acquisition system with virtual instrumentation, that measures,
analyzes and represents the parameters involved in the process.
MUAD allows voltage and current acquisition and measurement, data processing,
frequency spectrum and all the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
We easily connect the Electric Power Interface Box (EPIB) to the
application/module with the supplied cables (there are several connection points
placed for it). The EPIB is connected to the PC through the Data Acquisition Board
(DAB), and by using the Data Acquisition with Virtual Instrumentation Software, the
student can get results from the undertaken experiment/practice, see them on the
screen and work with them.
The MUAD system allows voltage and current measurement and acquisition, data processing, frequency spectrum and the functions of a digital oscilloscope.
4.- Electricity
This MUAD System includes EPIB + DAB + MUAD/SOF:
1)Hardware :
1.1) EPIB. Electric power interface box ( dimensions: 300 x 120 x 180 mm. approx.):
Interface that carries out the conditioning of the diverse signals that can be acquired in a process, for
their later treatment and visualisation.
In the front panel, the elements are separated in two parts: left-hand part to VOLTAGE sensors, and
right-hand part corresponds with CURRENT sensors.
Analog Input Channels:
8 analog input channels. Sampling range: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
4 Tension sensors AC/DC, 400V. 4 Current sensors.
1.2) DAB. Data acquisition board :
PCI Data acquisition board (National Instruments) to be placed in a computer slot.
Bus PCI.
Analog input:
Number of channels= 16 single-ended or 8 differential.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Sampling rate up to: 250 KSPS (Kilo samples per second).
Analog output:
Number of channels=2.
Resolution=16 bits, 1 in 65536.
Digital Input/Output:
Number channels=24inputs/outputs.
Timing: Counter/timers=2.
EPIB
DAB
2) MUAD/SOF. Data acquisition software :
Data Acquisition Software with Graphic Representation:
Amicable graphical frame.
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems.
Configurable software allowing the representation of temporal evolution of the different signals.
Visualization of a tension of the circuits on the computer screen.
Sampling velocity up to 250 KSPS. (Kilo samples per second) guaranteed.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/electricity/basic/LIELBA.pdf
Page 46
MUAD/SOF
issue:01/11
PLC TRAINER
Ref: 0610
1 / 1
ITEM
Ä
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLCE
PLC TRAINER
1
2
0620PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
3
0620PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
4
0620IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
5
0620CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
6
0620TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
7
0620MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
6.2- Automatics
PLC-PI. Module for the Control of Industrial Processes (for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units)
Always included
in the supply:
2
PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software for
each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit
1 Unit: PLC-PI. PLC Module for the Control of Industrial Processes
(for working with EDIBON Computerized Teaching Units).
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLC-PI Unit:
This PLC-PI unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a
simple and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen. We have design and supply the
proper software for any particular application (for each particular EDIBON
Computerized Teaching Unit).
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Digital inputs(X) and Digital outputs (Y) block. 16 Digital inputs. 14 Digital outputs.
Analog inputs block: 16 Analog inputs. Analog outputs block: 4 Analog outputs.
Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to PC
Inside:
Power supply outputs: 24 Vdc, 12 Vdc, -12 Vdc, 12 Vdc variable.
Panasonic PLC: High-speed scan of 0.32msec. for a basic instruction. Program
capacity of 32 Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS232 wire, to computer (PC).
2 PLC-SOF. PLC Control Software:
For each particular EDIBON Computerized Teaching Unit.
3 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
4 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.) =Unit: 490 x 330 x 310 mm.
Weight: 30 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Control of theparticular unit
process through the control
interface box without the
computer.
2.- PID control.
3.- Visualization of all the sensors
values used in the particular
unit process.
4.- Calibration of all sensors
included in the particular unit
process.
5.- Hand on of all the actuators
involved in the particular unit
process.
6.- Realization of different
experiments, in automatic way,
without having in front the
particular unit. (These
experiments can be decided
previously).
7.- Simulation of outside actions,
in the cases do not exist
hardware elements. (Example:
test of complementary tanks,
complementary i n d u s t r i a l
environment to the process to
be studied, etc).
8.- PLC hardware general use.
9.- PLC process application for the
particular unit.
10.- PLC structure.
11.- P L C i n p u t s a n d o u t p u t s
configuration.
12.- PLC configuration possibilities.
13.- PLC program languages.
14.- PLC different programming
standard languages (ladder
diagram (LD), structured text
(ST), instructions list (IL),
sequential function chart
(SFC), function block diagram
(FBD)).
15.- N e w c o n f i g u r a t i o n a n d
development of new process.
16.- Hand on an established process.
17.- To visualize and see the results
and to make comparisons with
the particular unit process.
18.- Possibility of creating new
process in relation with the
particular unit.
19.- PLC Programming Exercises.
20.- Own PLC applications in
accordance with teacher and
student requirements.
automationsystems/plcunitoperations/PLC-PI.pdf
PLCE. PLC Trainer
1
2
3
PLC
Programming
Software
PLCE
Touch Screen
Programming Software
Unit: PLCE. PLC Trainer
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Items supplied as standard
PLCE. Unit:
This PLCE unit contains a box, with a front panel in order to manipulate the unit in a simple
and easy way, the power supply and all necessary connectors and cabling and,
additionally, the PLC itself with its own touch screen.
Steel box. Circuit diagram in the front panel.
Front panel:
Several 12V sources that can be activated through switches, 8 lever type and 8 push
button type switches with their corresponding led that indicates the ON/OFF state of
the source. 6 variable sources (potentiometer), 0 to 10V. 16 digital inputs. 14 digital
outputs. 8 analog inputs. 4 analog outputs. ON/OF power switch. Several mass
connections (GND). Touch screen.
Back panel: Power supply connector. Fuse 2A. RS-232 connector to computer (PC).
Inside:
Power supply 100... 240V (AC).
Panasonic PLC:
High-speed scan of 0.32 msec for a basic instruction. Program capacity of 32
Ksteps, with a sufficient comment area. High-speed counter. Multi-point PID control.
Digital inputs/outputs and analog inputs/outputs Panasonic modules.
Communication RS 232 wire, to computer (PC). PC Bases Programming.
2 PLC Programming Software:
Compatible with actual Windows operating systems. Several programming languages
can be used: ladder diagram (LD), structured text (ST), instructions list (IL), sequential
function chart (SFC), function block diagram (FBD). Variables editors, configuration,
programming and documentation. To symbolize the application objects: bits, words,
function blocks, inputs/outputs...
Operants available: inputs and outputs (X/Y), as well as internal memory areas, internal
relays, special internal relays, timers and counters, data registers, special data registers,
file registers, link registers and relays. You can use either Matsushita and/or IEC
addresses. There are 3 type on constants: decimal, hexadecimal and BCD. This software
provides elementary and user defined data types. Matsushita Floating Point Instructions
Set. Uploading of source programs from PLC possible. “Black boxing” of programs. Reuse
of programs is easy.
3 PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
Tools for Screen Creation. Plenty of functions. Screens Creation. Drawing Functions. Easy
Operativity (Click and slip). Easy creation of user libraries. Printing. Easy use. Bitmaps
Editor.
Cables
and Accessories, for normal operation.
4
5 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions=490 x 330 x 310 mm. approx. Weight: 20 Kg. approx.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
automationsystems/plcprocessemulation/PLCE.pdf
Page 85
Using the PLC Programing Software:
1.- Creating applications for a PLC and loading them in the PLCE.
The programs can be written in several programming languages:
Ladder diagram (LD). Structured text (ST). Instructions list (IL).
Sequential function chart. (SFC).
Function block diagram. (FBD).
2.- Check the digital inputs and their value and how to store in the variable.
3.- Use of several inputs with the purpose of activating an output.
4.- To assign names to the contacts in the edition area.
5.- Use of all digital inputs (16) and to create a variable per digital input.
6.- Interacting with a digital output, whose value will depend on that
established in a variable.
7.- How to use several digital variables and outputs.
8.- How to use analog inputs.
9.- How to use analog outputs.
10.- Use of temporizers.
11.- Logic functions implementation.
12.- Application of the instructions set and reset.
13.- Program jumps (conditional and non-conditional).
14.- Timer, counter and comparators.
15.- Use of subroutines and interruptions events.
16.- Functions library.
17.- Regulation controls. PID function.
18.- Analog Inputs/Outputs. Real Time visualization.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Using the PLCE Touch Screen Programming Software:
19.- How to create a simple application for the PLCE screen.
20.- How to commute digital outputs of the PLC through the screen.
21.- How to commute several digital outputs simultaneously. (Working with
words).
22.- Writing on and reading from a data register.
23.- How to write a data register in a range of values.
24.- Switching from one screen to another.
* Some applications related to these practices are included in the supply.
Other practical possibilities:
-It is possible to make simulations without need of any external element,
causing analog inputs and/or digital ones, and to observe what
happens in the outputs.
-It is also possible to introduce real analog inputs (for example: the
transducer value in volts of a temperature sensor) and/or digital inputs
(for example: an external pulser) and to connect real actuators in the
output, (for example: a pump).
www.edibon.com
6.- Systems & Automatics
Always included
in the supply:
issue:01/11
PLC PROCESS EMULATORS APPLICATIONS MODULE
Ref: 0620
ITEM
1 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
1
PLCE-CST
TRAFFIC SIGNAL CONTROL
1
2
PLCE-AV
CAR PARKING
1
3
PLCE-AG2Z
TWO ZONES PARKING GARAGE
1
4
PLCE-CA
ELEVATOR CONTROL
1
5
PLCE-CLA
AUTOMATIC WASHING MACHINE CONTROL
1
6
PLCE-MB
DRINKS MACHINE
1
7
PLCE-MBC
HOT DRINKS MACHINE
1
8
PLCE-CB
PUMP CONTROL
1
9
PLCE-MA
EMBOSSING MACHINE
1
10
PLCE-ST
DRILLING SYSTEM
1
11
PLCE-SBAR
DIRTY-WATER PUMP SYSTEM
1
12
PLCE-SBP
PUMP SYSTEM (PRESSURE)
1
13
PLCE-SL
CLEANING SYSTEM
1
14
PLCE-SALL
AUTOMATIC FILLING SYSTEM
1
15
PLCE-SBT
CONVEYOR BELTS SYSTEM
1
16
PLCE-SCCT
CONVEYOR CHARGING SYSTEM
1
17
PLCE-SCA
CANALIZATION SYSTEM
1
18
PLCE-SDT
PIPE BENDING SYSTEM
1
19
PLCE-PAE
AUTOMATIC STAMPING PRESS
1
20
PLCE-PLLT
FILLING PROCESS OF TANKS
1
21
PLCE-SCC
COLLECTING BELT CONVEYOR
1
22
PLCE-MCC
MAILS ALLOCATION MACHINE
1
23
PLCE-RAC
COMPRESSED AIR NETWORK
1
24
PLCE-TC
COAL TREATMENT
1
25
PLCE-PELE
PACKING LINE AND BOTTLING PLANT
1
26
PLCE-CA2P
TWO-DOORS ACCESS CONTROL
1
27
PLCE-CI
FIRE CONTROL
1
28
PLCE-CP
PROXIMITY CONTROL
1
29
PLCE-CCO
SLUICE GATE CONTROL
1
30
PLCE-CNC
LEVEL AND FLOW CONTROL
1
31
PLCE-CNTA
WATER TOWER LEVEL CONTROL
1
32
PLCE-CF
PHOTO CONTROL
1
33
PLCE-CMM
MOLDING MACHINE CONTROL
1
34
PLCE-CPOS
POSITION CONTROL
1
35
PLCE-CS
SILO CONTROL
1
36
PLCE-CACV
VEHICLE FEEDING & LOADING CONTROL
1
37
PLCE-ACC
FEEDING AND LOADING CONTROL
1
38
PLCE-CML
LIQUIDS BLENDING CONTROL
1
39
PLCE-CME
MIXER CONTROL
1
40
PLCE-CR
REACTOR CONTROL
1
41
PLCE-CCP
COUNT AND POSITION CONTROL
1
42
PLCE-CL
ROLLING MILL CONTROL
1
Ref: 0620
ITEM
2 / 3
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
43
PLCE-CTRA
WORKCELL APPLICATION
1
44
PLCE-CTI
TOWER LIGHTING CONTROL
1
45
PLCE-AC
BUFFER STORAGE
1
46
PLCE-RT
TEMPERATURE REGULATION
1
47
PLCE-CSC
HEATING SYSTEM CONTROL
1
48
PLCE-CSV
VENTILATION SYSTEM CONTROL
1
49
PLCE-M
MOTOR CONTROL
1
50
PLCE-MPP
STEPPER MOTOR CONTROL
1
51
PLCE-MET
STAR-DELTA CONNECTION
1
52
PLCE-MCETI
REVERSING STAR-DELTA CONNECTION
1
53
PLCE-MD
DAHLANDER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1
54
PLCE-M2BS
MOTOR WITH 2 SEPARATE WINDINGS
1
55
PLCE-MAC
STARTING A WOUND-ROTOR MOTOR
1
56
PLCE-AN
ANNUNCIATOR
1
57
PLCE-SLU
RUNNING LIGHT
1
58
PLCE-CPR
REACTIVE CURRENT COMPENSATION
1
59
PLCE-MCI
REVERSING CONTACTOR
1
60
0620PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
61
0620PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
62
0620IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
63
0620CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
64
0620TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
65
0620MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 0620
3 / 3
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Traffic and Parking
PLCE-CST. Traffic Signal Control
It represents an automatic traffic signal control where is possible to
emulate a traffic crossroads.
We can select the operation mode choosing between day or night and
to control the traffic state using traffic lights and vehicle detectors.
The pedestrians can request to stop the vehicles flow pushing a button.
PLCE-AV. Car Parking
It represents a car parking where is possible to emulate the elements
used in a typical car parking like barriers, vehicles presence detectors,
traffic lights, fire sensors.
We can know the number of vehicles inside the parking with lights and
if the parking is full or free.
PLCE-AG2Z. Two Zones Parking Garage
It represents a parking garage with two zones where is possible to
emulate the control of four barriers, two in the entrances an two in the
exits, in the automatic parking.
We can know the number of vehicles inside the parking with lights and
if the parking is full or free.
Page 8
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Small Industrial Machines
PLCE-CA. Elevator Control
It represents an elevator control allowing to emulate the sequence of
actions of an elevator in a three floors building.
The elevator’s state using different sensors and lights can be
demonstrated.
It is included elements like alarms, lights and calling buttons in the
emulation, etc.
The sequence of actions in the elevator’s control panel can be seen
too.
PLCE-CLA. Automatic Washing Machine Control
It represents an automatic washing machine control allowing to
emulate the sequence of actions carried out by a washing machine.
We can start/stop the system, to use the three program selector, the
temperature control and to know the machine’s state using different
sensors and lights which indicates us the machine’s actions and its
state.
PLCE-MB. Drinks Machine
It represents an automatic drinks machine where we have the
possibility of work with a complete scheme of actions of an automatic
drinks machine.
We can select a drink, to insert coins, to obtain drinks, the coins can be
returned pushing a button and is possible to simulate the fault of drinks
in different columns.
PLCE-MBC. Hot Drinks Machine
It represents an automatic hot drinks machine where we have the
possibility of work with a complete scheme of actions of an automatic
hot drinks machine.
We can select a drink, we can know the level of drink using sensors and
the status of the machine.
Finally we can select sugar and extra-milk.
Page 9
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CB. Pump Control
It represents a pump control where we have four pumps inserting water
in a big tank.
We can regulate the number of pumps working and to know the level
of water into the tank using level sensors.
Is possible to regulate the discharge rate with the output valve in the
tank.
PLCE-MA. Embossing Machine
It represents the embossing process of metal disks controlled with an
electropneumatic system.
The valves regulate the flow of gas to the electropneumatic system
moving the steel punches and we can know the position of the steel
punches using position sensors.
Page 10
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Small Industrial Systems
PLCE-ST. Drilling System
It represents a drilling system where we can emulate the movements of
a drill.
We have two motors one for vertical movements and the other one is
the motor of the drill.
We can switch on/off the coolant valve and to select the clamping
pressure.
PLCE-SBAR. Dirty-Water Pump System
It represents a dirty-water pump system where we can emulate the
control of the dirty-water flow using a valve and two pumps which
insert dirty-water in the pipe from the dirty-water tank.
The level of dirty-water into the tank is measured using four level
sensors.
PLCE-SBP. Pump System (Pressure)
It represents a pressure system where we use two pumps with their
motors when we have to introduce air in the tank.
We can activate or deactivate the pumps with the three-phase
contactors.
In the tank we have two level sensors and a pressure sensor.
The output of the pressured air is controlled using a flow sensor.
PLCE-SL. Cleaning System
It represents a cleaning system where is possible to emulate the
movement of a basket which has vertical movements.
The electrovalve has three positions and it can move the basket from its
position to the designated position with a manual regulator.
We can know the position of the basket using position sensors.
Page 11
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-SALL. Automatic Filling System
It represents an automatic filling system where we can choose the
number of elements packed in each pack.
We can emulate the motors and the presence sensor of the system
working.
We can emulate the movement of the conveyor belt with the packs in
this filling process.
PLCE-SBT. Conveyor Belts System
It represents a conveyor belts system where is possible to emulate a
system of sand transport.
We can activate or deactivate the three motors using the three-phase
contactors.
We have the possibility of simulate faults in the three-phase fuses and
the three-phase magnetothermics.
PLCE-SCCT. Conveyor Charging System
It represents a conveyor charging system where is possible to emulate
the work of four conveyor belts switching on/off their motors and we
can open or close three lock gates.
With this system we can control the conveyor charge process.
PLCE-SCA. Canalization System
It represents a channeling system where we have a dam which provides
water using a general pipe with a general valve.
This general pipe provides water to other pipes, those pipes provides
water to the houses, parks, etc using their own little valves.
In the homes the valves which regulate the water flow are taps.
Page 12
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-SDT. Pipe Bending System
It represents a pipe bending system where we can emulate the bending
process of the pipe.
We can start/stop the system using a switch and to know the state of the
machine with maximum/minimum sensors, to insert pipes with an
electrovalve and to control the conveyor belt.
We will know if we have a pipe in the machine with the piece presence
sensor.
PLCE-PAE. Automatic Stamping Press
It represents an automatic stamping press where is possible to emulate
the pressing process of steel sheets.
We can know the state of the press and electrovalve with the
maximum/minimum sensors.
The press has a piece presence sensor, and warning lights.
We can control the rollers and the conveyor belt with switches.
Page 13
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Big Industrial Systems
PLCE-PLLT. Filling Process of Tanks
It represents a filling process of tanks with three tanks where we can
emulate the filling and emptying processes of the tanks and the level of
the liquid inside the tanks.
Is possible to switch on or switch off the different input or output valves
of each tank.
PLCE-SCC. Collecting Belt Conveyor
It represents a collecting belt conveyor system where is possible to
emulate five conveyor belts transporting different materials to the
general conveyor belt.
We can activate or deactivate the five conveyor belt motors and switch
on/off the general conveyor belt in two directions left and right.
PLCE-MCC. Mails Allocation Machine
It represents a mails allocation machine which allocate the mails to
different cities.
It uses five motors, one for each city and a conveyor belt.
We can activate or deactivate each motor and the general conveyor
belt.
The general system can be activated or deactivated.
PLCE-RAC. Compressed Air Network
It represents a compressed air network where is possible to emulate
the actions in an air network.
We can control valves, dryer, motors with contactors and we can know
the flow in the output of the compressor with a sensor.
The electrovalve moves the final piston.
Page 14
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-TC. Coal Treatment
It represents a coal treatment system where we can see three chutes
with three valves each one and a big tank.
We can control the flow of coal with the three valves and is possible to
know if the tank or the chutes are full using coal presence sensors.
PLCE-PELE. Packing Line and Bottling Plant
It represents an automatic packing line and bottling machine where is
possible to emulate the processes of bottling, sealing, labeling,
packing and palletizing.
In this automatic plant we can control the movement of the conveyor
belt and to obtain information about the process using sensors.
Page 15
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Simple Control Applications
PLCE-CA2P. Two-Doors Access Control
It represents two automatic doors where is possible to emulate the
movements and positions of each automatic door using sensors and
electrical motors.
We have the option of activate or deactivate the electrical motors.
The doors can be opened using the presence sensors.
PLCE-CI. Fire Control
It represents a fire control station where is possible to emulate different
emergency situations with fire.
We have the possibility of activate and deactivate the alarm buttons,
the fire detectors, the uninterruptible power supply, the elevator, the
emergency door, the exit signs, and the temperature sensors.
We can also activate the water pump.
PLCE-CP. Proximity Control (security)
It represents a proximity and presence security control where we can
obtain information about the presence in different places of a bank
office using a PIR sensor, presence sensor, magnetic sensor and
infrared electronic barriers.
The office has an alarm and a bell.
We can also activate a security camera and the security key.
PLCE-CCO. Sluice Gate Control
It represents a sluice gate control where we can see three sluice gates
and we have to control them using the water pumps and the gates
control.
We can start/stop the system using the general switch and we have the
possibility of faults using the fuses and the magnetothermics.
Page 16
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CNC. Level and Flow Control
It represents a level and flow control where we can fill the tank with
water.
We can control the water supply and the water outflow with an
electrovalve.
We know the state of the tank with a capacitance probe which shows
the level of water in the tank with lights.
PLCE-CNTA. Water Tower Level Control
It represents a water tower level control where is possible to emulate
the water flow control with the input valve and the motor of the pump.
We can measure the level of water in the tank and in the water tower
using sensors.
PLCE-CF. Photo Control
It represents a photo control machine where is possible to emulate the
functions of the camera, dryer, flash and printer.
We have a photo presence sensor, a coin presence sensor and the
return coins possibility.
Finally we can switch on/off the machine.
PLCE-CMM. Molding Machine Control
It represents a molding machine control where we can emulate a
machine which gives shape to the pieces pushing them.
It works with three electrovalves which we can activate or deactivate,
each electrovalve has a limit switch.
Page 17
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CPOS. Position Control
It represents a position control where we can move the sheet to the
correct position using a motor with a lefthand and righthand rotation
and crowling speed the incremental shaft encoder can count pulses
and to give a fine sincronism.
We have the possibility of saw the sheet connecting the saw motor.
PLCE-CS. Silo Control
It represents a silo control system where we can emulate the filling
process.
The filling motor has a manual rate or an automatic rate and the
output valve has its own discharge rate.
We can measure the level with four presence sensors and to know if the
silo is full with the full sensor.
PLCE-CACV. Vehicle Feeding & Loading Control
It represents a vehicle feeding control where we use three conveyor
belts to transport the material to the vehicles.
We can switch on/off each conveyor belt and the valves.
We have two traffic lights which can indicate when the vehicle can start
its movement and a weight vehicle sensor.
Page 18
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Industrial Control Applications
PLCE-ACC. Feeding and Loading Control
It represents a feeding and loading control system where we can
control the voltage in the load between the A-B terminals.
We have to select a configuration which activate or deactivate the
mosfets and we can know what switch is closed with its own light.
We can see in the graph the state of the voltage in the load between the
A-B terminals.
PLCE-CML. Liquids Blending Control
It represents a liquids blending control where is possible to emulate
the mix of different liquids and their flows are regulated using four
valves.
The liquids are mixed using a mixer with its own motor.
The flow of the mix is regulated using an output valve.
We can measure the temperature and the level of liquid with sensors.
PLCE-CME. Mixer Control
It represents a mixer control where we can emulate the mix with two
different products in a big chute from two little chutes using conveyor
belts, finally the general conveyor belt will transport the mix.
We will control the motors of the conveyor belts and the valves in the
system and we will know the big chute's level using sensors.
PLCE-CR. Reactor Control
It represents a reactor control where is possible to emulate the mix of a
catalyst, an inert gas and the substance.
We can regulate the catalyst and the inert gas flow with valves, and the
substance with a pump.
The inlet and the output of the product are regulated using valves.
We mix the substances with an agitator into the reactor.
Page 19
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-CCP. Count and Position Control
It represents a count and position control where is possible to emulate
the robot’s movement selecting the general final position.
It shows with lights the final selected position of each motor.
We can know when the robot is opening or closing its hand and when it
has taken a piece with light signals.
PLCE-CL. Rolling Mill Control
It represents a rolling mill control where is possible to emulate the
position of rolling mill, the movement of the different motors and the
position of the conveyor belt using an electrovalve.
We can obtain information about the presence and the thickness of
each sheet of metal using sensors.
PLCE-CTRA. WorkCell Application
It represents a workcell with a robot inside where is possible to emulate
the automatic work of a robot and the conveyor belts.
We can activate or deactivate the conveyor belts and start/stop the
general system.
We have input and output sensors and a light which indicates when the
robot is working.
PLCE-CTI. Tower Lighting Control
It represents a tower lighting control where is possible to emulate the
lighting of different levels of a tower using a lights system.
It has two directions up and down and we can know the level using a
display.
Page 20
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Thermal Applications
PLCE-AC. Buffer Storage
It represents a buffer storage system where is possible to emulate the
storage of heat using fluids.
We can control the valves state, the pumps, the boiler, and the buffer
storage tank state.
Is possible to know when the collector is working using a sensor.
PLCE-RT. Temperature Regulation
It represents a temperature regulation system where we can control the
temperature inside our home.
We can regulate the temperature using the thermostat and the
temperature sensor.
The heater and the solar cells will heat the water inside the water circuit
and it will fill the radiator heating the house.
PLCE-CSC. Heating System Control
It represents a heating system control where is possible to emulate the
heating process controlling the flow of hot water into the circuit
activating or deactivating the valves in the pipes and using the
temperature control regulator.
We can start/stop the system using a general switch.
PLCE-CSV. Ventilation System Control
It represents a ventilation system control where we are trying to clean
the air in a garage.
We can control the air inside measuring the level of CO and smoke
with sensors.
We can activate four pumps and two fans.
Is possible to control the traffic lights and the automatic barriers.
Page 21
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Electrical Machines Control (Motors)
PLCE-M. Motor Control
It represents a motor control where is possible to emulate the
movements of a three-phase motor with both turning directions
controlled by three-phase contactors.
In the secondary, we can use the three-phase contactors with the star
or delta connection.
PLCE-MPP. Stepper Motor Control
It represents a motor control where is possible to emulate the stepper
motor.
We can start/stop the stepper motor using a switch.
It has reverse/forward directions controlled by a switch, and it can be
controlled in manual or automatic mode.
The speed regulation is controlled using three switches and the
position is controlled using an encoder.
PLCE-MET. Star-Delta Connection
It represents a star-delta connection in the secondary and emulates
the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor and connect the secondary in
star-delta connection using the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
PLCE-MCETI. Reversing Star-Delta Connection
It represents a reversing motor with star-delta connection in the
secondary and emulates the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions and
connect the secondary in star-delta connection using the three-phase
contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
Page 22
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
PLCE-MD. Dahlander Motor Circuit
It represents a Dahlander motor which has two connections of velocity
with 2 and 4 poles and emulates the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions and to
connect it with 2 or 4 poles using the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
PLCE-M2BS. Motor with 2 Separate Windings
It represents a motor with two separate windings and emulates the
motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor and to connect the different
windings and the secondary with the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
PLCE-MAC. Starting a Wound-Rotor Motor
It represents the starting of a wound-rotor motor where is possible to
emulate the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor and to connect the secondary
with different loads with the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
Page 23
www.edibon.com
PLC Process Emulators for working with PLCE
†Alarms/Current
PLCE-AN. Annunciator
It represents an annunciator where is possible to emulate the
operation of one of this machines which shows what button is pushed
lighting the button pushed.
We have an annunciator with several buttons and near of the
annunciator we have an electrical scheme which shows what switch is
activated or deactivated.
PLCE-SLU. Running Lights
It represents a running lights system where we can emulate the control
of the eight lights in different speed, sequence and direction.
We can start/stop the system using a switch and we can do it in
automatic or manual state.
We have three kinds of sequences and two directions and an speed
control.
PLCE-CPR. Reactive Current Compensation
It represents a reactive current compensation system where is possible
to emulate the connection of three-phase capacitive loads.
We can connect each load using the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses.
PLCE-MCI. Reversing Contactor
It represents a three-phase motor with reversing contactors and
emulates the motor's movement.
Is possible to switch on/off the motor in both turning directions using
the three-phase contactors.
We can simulate faults with the three-phase fuses and the
magnetothermics.
Page 24
www.edibon.com
issue:01/11
AUTOMATION (CONTROL) MODULE
Ref: 0652
1 / 2
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
UCP
UCP-UB
UCP/CIB
DAB
UCP/CCSOF
,
UCP-T
UCP-C
UCP-N
UCP-PA
UCP-pH
UCP-CT
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS
CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
UCP/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
1
3
UCP-P
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR), COMPUTER CONTROLLED. FORMED
BY:
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR)
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF PRESSURE (AIR)
1
UCP-P.Unit
UCP-P/CIB
DAB
UCP-P/CCSOF
1
1
1
1
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
PRESSURE (AIR) (RESULTS CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
CECI
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS TRAINER
1
CECI/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS TRAINER (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
CRCI
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING
1
CRCI/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
CEAB
TRAINER FOR FIELDS BUS APPLICATION
1
4
UCP-P/CAL
5
6
7
8
9
Ref: 0652
2 / 2
ITEM
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY.
10
CEAB/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
TRAINER FOR FIELD BUS APPLICATION (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
11
CEAC
CONTROLLER TURNING TRAINER
1
12
CEAC/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
CONTROLLER TURNING TRAINER (RESULTS
CALCULATION AND ANALYSIS)
1
13
EPID/T
INDUSTRIAL CONTROLLERS NETWORKING
1
14
EPID/T/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
INDUSTRIAL REGULATION TRAINER, PID TYPE
(TEMPERATURE) (RESULTS AND CALCULATION AND
ANALYSIS)
1
15
0652PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
16
0652PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
17
0652IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING UP
1
18
0652CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
19
0652TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
20
0652MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
UCP. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCP-UB. Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCP-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
4.3 UCP-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.4 UCP-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
4.2 UCP-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
+
+
UCP-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.5
10.- Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
+
4.6 UCP-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCP-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one
or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve.
2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or
several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf
Page 90
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCN-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
4.4 UCPCN-PA.
+
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
4.5
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf
Page 91
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCV-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
4.5
UCPCV-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
4.4
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 92
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them
and, if possible, solve them.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections:
Faults affecting the sensors measure:
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to
calibrate the affected sensor through the
values collection.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.)
- Actuators canals interchange at any time
during the program execution.
This error does not admit any solution.
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog
outputs, we can get an response with
a fraction of what it should be, either with a
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...).
Faults in the controls execution:
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it
should be ON
is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct
operating logic.
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total
response.
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the
reduction or increase of the action really applied
to the actuator, and the consequent
instability of the control. The student should notify
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/
UCP.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Incorrect Calibration:
1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
Non Linearity:
5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
Interchange of actuators:
9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
Reduction of an actuator response:
10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
(Affected sensor: pH).
Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
sensor).
The action of some controls is annulled:
13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
control (Proportional-Derivative).
14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
2
1 Unit: UCP-P. Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
of different pressure sensor.
2.- Calibration processes.
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
the hysteresis curve.
4.- I/P converter calibration.
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
type.
6.- Determination of the influence of the
flow rate of the conduction.
7.- Pressure control in conduction using
a PID controller.
8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
9.- Characteristics of a proportional
and integral control (P+I).
10.- Characteristics of a proportional
and derivative control (P+D).
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
PID controller.
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
PID controller, flow control.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
UCP-P. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and
the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 5 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 93
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial
process controller.
Steel box.
Configurable digital controller:
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on
computer (PC).
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V.
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V.
Controlled system simulator:
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks .
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...).
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 8 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf
(continuation)
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
To study methods and terminology of
process control:
1.-Closed loop control.
2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
3.-To study the step response.
4.-Reference variable step.
To learn and to familiarise with a process
controller:
5.-Configuration level.
6.-Parameter level.
7.-Operation control levels.
Control parameters:
8.-Setting input channels.
9.-Setting output channels.
10.-To use computer (PC) - based
configuration tools.
11.- Scaling displays.
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system
based on a simple application.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation
of a industrial process controller.
Steel box.
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as
analog signals at lab jacks .
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Function of a digital industrial
controller.
2.- Layout of a field bus system.
To learn and to familiarise with the
operation and structure of a process
control system under Profibus DP:
3.- Controller parameter setting via field
bus system.
4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
server function.
6.- Online controller parameters
setting.
7.- Master / slave assignment.
8.- To configure and display alarms.
9.- Reading control variables and
displaying them online.
10.- Scaling displays.
11.- Bus configuration.
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
10.- Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP.
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a
Profibus DP interface (master).
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology,
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc.
Steel box.
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V.
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital
inputs. Four digital outputs.
Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V.
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and
process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control
loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
optimum response.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability,
disturbance and control response are demonstrated.
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can
recorder and analyse the time response using the software.
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer
(PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data
acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
Steel box.
Configurable digital process controller, with interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC).
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response,
non-linearity and limitation.
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of
time response on computer (PC).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
Page 94
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Operation and function of a digital
industrial controller.
2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
module.
3.- Function of a digital input/output
module.
4.- Layout of a field bus system.
5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
stations.
6.- Defining the bus technology with the
stations.
7.- Reading out and in, and online
displaying of analog and digital
process variables.
8.- Communication protocols.
9.- To define tags.
10.- Familiarisation with the device
master file “DMF”.
11.- OPC server.
12.- Access to the OPC database from
the process control program.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To use commonly applied tuning
rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
2.- To study the difference between
open and closed loop control.
3.- Control loop comprising controller
and controlled system.
4.- To determine the system parameters.
5.- Closed-loop control system
response.
6.- Choice of optimum controller
parameters.
7.- Stability, steady state and transient
response.
8.- Study and investigation of control
and disturbance response.
9.- Study of the stability of the closed
control loop.
10.- Learning methods and terminology
involved in process control.
11.- To adapt the process controller to
different controlled systems.
12.- Use and practices with the
simulation software.
issue:01/11
PROCESS CONTROL.BASIC MODULE
Ref: 1010
1 / 2
ITEM
1
REFERENCE
UCP
UCP-UB
UCP/CIB
DAB
UCP/CCSOF
,
UCP-T
UCP-C
UCP-N
UCP-PA
UCP-pH
UCP-CT
DESCRIPTION
COMPUTER CONTROLLED PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
(WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL VALVE) FOR PROCESS
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER
PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL
DISOLVED SOLIDS, FORMED BY:
BASE UNIT. (COMMON FOR ALL SETS FOR PROCESS
CONTROL TYPE "UCP")
CONTROL INTERFACE BOX FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
DATA ACQUISITION BOARD
COMPUTER CONTROL + DATA ACQUISITION + DATA
MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE FOR PROCESS CONTROL
UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF TEMPERATURE, FLOW,
LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE AND CONDUCTIVITY AND
TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
SETS (SENSOR, ELEMENTS AND COMPUTER CONTROL
SOFTWARE) USED IN BASE UNIT:
SET FOR TEMPERATURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR FLOW PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR LEVEL PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR WATER PRESSURE PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR pH PROCESS CONTROL
SET FOR CONDUCTIVITY AND TDS (TOTAL
DISSOLVED SOLIDS) PROCESS CONTROL
QTY.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
UCP/CAL
COMPUTER AIDED LEARNING SOFTWARE FOR
PROCESS CONTROL UNIT FOR THE STUDY OF
TEMPERATURE, FLOW, LEVEL , WATER PRESSURE
AND CONDUCTIVITY AND TOTAL DISOLVED SOLIDS
1
3
1010PARTS
COMPONENTS AND SPARE PARTS
1
4
1010PA
COMPLEMENTARY ITEM
1
5
1010IYPM
INSTALLATION AND STARTING-UP
1
6
1010CAPRO
TRAINING AND BRINGING UP TO DATE OF TEACHERS
1
7
1010TD
TEACHING TECHNIQUES "KNOW-HOW"
1
8
1010MANU
DOCUMENTATION AND MANUALS
1
Ref: 1010
2 / 2
Notes:
1) Multipost option:
This module has only one unit in each item, but we can recommend the
number of units for 10 or 30 students working simultaneously.
2)Supply conditions:
a) Technical conditions included:
-
Laboratories adaptation.
Installation of all units supplied.
Starting up for all units.
Training about the exercises to be done with any unit.
- Teacher training related with t and the teaching unit and
the teaching techniques uses.
- Technology transfer.
b) Commercial conditions:
- Packing.
- Financing charges.
- C.I.F. charges.
c) Others conditions:
- 8 Manuals for each EDIBON teaching unit:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Required services manual.
Assembly and installation manual.
Interface and software/control console manual.
Set in operation manual.
Safety norms manual.
Practices manual.
Maintenance manual.
. Calibration manual.
See Catalogues in next pages
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
UCP. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with electronic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCP-UB. Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCP-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
4.3 UCP-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.4 UCP-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
4.2 UCP-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
+
+
UCP-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.5
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
+
4.6 UCP-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCP-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one
or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Proportional valve: motorized control valve.
2 UCP/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCP” and can work with one or
several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCP-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCP-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCP-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCP-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCP-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCP-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCP-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP.pdf
Page 61
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCN. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with pneumatic control valve):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCN-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCN-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
4.4 UCPCN-PA.
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCN-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCN-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
10.- Process Control
+
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
4.5
Set for Pressure
Process Control
Sensor and elements
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCN-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Pneumatic Control Valve.
2 UCPCN/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCN” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCN-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCN-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCN-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4 UCPCN-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5UCPCN-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6 UCPCN-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCN-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCN.pdf
Page 62
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCPCV. Computer Controlled Process Control System (with speed controller):
Teaching
Technique
used
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
1
UCPCV-UB.
Base Unit
( )
3
2
Data Acquisition Computer Control
Software for each
Board
Set for Process
5 Cables and Accessories
Control
6 Manuals
Control Interface Box
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
+
Computer Control
Software for
Temperature Process
Control ( )
4.1 UCPCV-T.
Set for Temperature
Process Control
Sensor and elements
Sensor and elements
+
+
Computer Control
Software for Flow
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-C.
Set for Flow
Process Control
4.2
Computer Control
Software for Level
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-N.
Set for Level
Process Control
4.3
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Sensor and elements
+
Computer Control
Software for
Pressure Process
Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for pH
Process Control ( )
Computer Control
Software for Conductivity
and TDS
Process Control ( )
UCPCV-PA.
Set for Pressure
Process Control
4.5
UCPCV-PH.
Set for PH
Process Control
4.6 UCPCV-CT.
Set for Conductivity
and TDS( Total Dissolved
Solids)Process Control
4.4
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Common items for all Process Control parameters:
1 UCPCV-UB. Unit:
This unit is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with
one or several sets.
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that
the elements in the real unit. Main tank and collector with an orifice in the central
dividing wall.(2x25 dm3), and drainage in both compartments. Dual process tank
(2x10 dm3), interconnected through an orifice and a ball valve and an overflow in the
dividing wall; a graduate scale and a threaded drain of adjustable level with bypass.
Centrifugal pumps. Variable area flow meters (0.2-2 1/min, and 0.2-10 1/min), and
with a manual valve. Line of on/off regulation valves (solenoid), and manual drainage
valves of the upper tank. Speed controller (into the Control Interface Box).
2 UCPCV/CIB. Control Interface Box :
This is common for all Sets for Process Control type “UCPCV” and can work with one
or several sets.
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently
computer controlled. Simultaneous visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in
the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real time curves
representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the
keyboard. Shield and filtered signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID
control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the PID parameters, at
any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time
and in a real time, of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in
the unit, electronic in control interface, and the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16
Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to: 250 KS/s . 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital
Inputs/Outputs.
4 Sets (sensor and elements + computer control software) used in the base unit:
(These Sets will be supplied and installed in the Base Unit and ready for working)
4.1
UCPCV-T. Set for Temperature Process Control:
Temperature sensor “J type”. Electric resistor (0.5 KW). Helix agitator. On/off level
switch. (It determines the performance of the immersion resistor).
Computer Control Software for Temperature Process Control:
(#) Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing,comparison
and storage of data. Sampling velocity up to 250,000 data per second. It allows
the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real time.
4.2
UCPCV-C. Set for Flow Process Control:
Turbine type flow sensor.
Computer Control Software for Flow Process Control. (#)
4.3
UCPCV-N. Set for Level Process Control:
0-300mm level sensor (of capacitive immersion, 4-20mA).
Computer Control Software for Level Process Control. (#).
4.4
UCPCV-PA. Set for Pressure Process Control:
Pressure sensor.
Computer Control Software for Pressure Process Control. (#).
4.5 UCPCV-PH. Set for pH Process Control:
pH sensor. Helix agitator.
Computer Control Software for pH Process Control. (#).
4.6
UCPCV-CT. Set for Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process
Control:
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) sensor.
Computer Control Software for Conductivity and TDS Process Control.(#).
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions(approx.)=UCPCV-UB Unit: 500x1000x1000mm. Weight: 40Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x310mm. Weight: 10 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/
processcontrol/fundamentals/UCPCV.pdf
Page 63
Temperature Process Control:
1.- Temperature control loops (Manual).
2.- Temperature control loops (On/Off).
3.- Temperature control loops (P).
4.- Temperature control loops (P+I).
5.- Temperature control loops (P+D).
6.- Temperature control loops (P+I+D).
7.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Ziegler- Nichols).
8.- Adjustment of the constant of a controller of temperature (Reaction Curves).
9.- Temperature sensor calibration.
Flow Process Control:
10.- Flow control loops (Manual).
11.- Flow control loops (On/Off).
12.- Flow control loops (P).
13.- Flow control loops (P+I).
14.- Flow control loops (P+ D).
15.- Flow control loops (P+I+I).
16.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Ziegler -Nichols).
17.- Adjustment of the flow controller constants (Reaction Curves).
18.- Flow sensor calibration.
Level Process Control:
19.- Level control loops (Manual).
20.- Level control loops (On/Off).
21.- Level control loops (Proportional).
22.- Level control loops (P+I).
23.- Level control loops (P+D).
24.- Level control loops(P+I+D).
25.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
26.- Adjustment of the constants of a flow controller (Reaction Curves).
27.- Level sensor calibration.
Pressure Process Control:
28.- Pressure control loops (Manual).
29.- Pressure control loops(On/Off).
30.- Pressure control loops (P).
31.- Pressure control loops (P+I).
32.- Pressure control loops (P+D).
33.- Pressure control loops (P+I+D).
34.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
35.- Adjustment of the constant of a Pressure controller (Reaction Curves).
36.- Pressure sensor calibration.
pH Process Control:
37.- pH control loops (Manual).
38.- pH control loops(On/Off).
39.- pH control loops (P).
40.- pH control loops (P+I).
41.- pH control loops (P+D).
42.- pH control loops (P+I+D).
43.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
44.- Adjustment of the constant of a pH controller (Reaction Curves).
45.- pH sensor calibration.
Conductivity and TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) Process Control:
46.- Conductivity control loops (Manual).
47.- Conductivity control loops(On/Off).
48.- Conductivity control loops (P).
49.- Conductivity control loops (P+I).
50.- Conductivity control loops (P + D).
51.- Conductivity control loops (P+I+D).
52.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
53.- Adjustment of the constant of a Conductivity controller (Reaction Curves)
54.- TDS control loops (Manual).
55.- TDS control loops(On/Off).
56.- TDS control loops (P).
57.- TDS control loops (P+I).
58.- TDS control loops (P+D).
59.- TDS control loops (P+I+D).
60.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Ziegler-Nichols).
61.- Adjustment of the constant of a TDS controller (Reaction Curves).
62.- Conductivity and TDS sensor calibration.
63-81.- Practices with PLC.
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
Sensor and elements
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
(continuation)
UCP/FSS. Faults Simulation System (Process Control Unit):
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
The "FAULTS" mode consists on provoking several faults
in the unit normal operation. The student must find them
and, if possible, solve them.
There are several kinds of faults that can be grouped in
three sections:
Faults affecting the sensors measure:
- An incorrect calibration is applied to them.
In this case, the student should proceed to
calibrate the affected sensor through the
values collection.
- Non-linearity.
When we have the measures taken by the
sensor, a quadratic or inverse function is
applied to them. Thus, the value measured will
not be the real one, as in the case above
mentioned, but when we calibrate again, the
sensor will not operate linearly and we will not be
able to calibrate it by lest squares fits.
Faults affecting the actuators: (These do not admit
solutions. The student must just realise it and
notify it.)
- Actuators canals interchange at any time
during the program execution.
This error does not admit any solution.
- Response reduction of an actuator.
By the reduction of the output voltage in analog
outputs, we can get an response with
a fraction of what it should be, either with a
manual execution or with any control type
(ON/OFF, PID...).
Faults in the controls execution:
- Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls.
The state of some actuator is inverted, when it
should be ON
is OFF instead, and vice
versa. The student should provide the correct
operating logic.
- Reduction or increase of the calculated total
response.
We multiply by a factor the total response
calculated by the PID, provoking, thus, the
reduction or increase of the action really applied
to the actuator, and the consequent
instability of the control. The student should notify
it and try to calculate this factor.
- The action of some controls is annulled.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/
catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/
UCP.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Incorrect Calibration:
1.- Load the calibration error of the PH sensor.
2.- Load the calibration error of the Level sensor.
3.- Load the calibration error of the Flow sensor.
4.- Load the calibration error of the Temperature sensor.
Non Linearity:
5.- Non inverse linearity of the pH sensor.
6.- Non quadratic linearity of the Level sensor.
7.- Non quadratic linearity of the Flow sensor.
8.- No inverse linearity of the Temperature sensor.
Interchange of actuators:
9.- Interchange the bombs AB-1 and AB-2 between
them during the operations of the controls ON/OFF
and PID. (Affected sensor: Level sensor).
Reduction of an actuator response:
10.- In the PID, the real response of the proportional valve is
half the amount calculated by the PID control. Thus,
the maximum real opening that will be able to reach is
50%. (Affected sensor: Flow sensor).
Inversion of the performance in ON/OFF controls:
11.- In the ON/OFF control, the actuation sensor of the
AVS-1 is inverted, acting, thus, on the same way as the
others 2 valves (for a good control, it should operate
the other way around to how the others 2 do it).
(Affected sensor: pH).
Reduction or increase of the calculated total response:
12.- In the PID, the real action in the resistance is half of the
total calculated. (Affected sensor: Temperature
sensor).
The action of some controls is annulled:
13.- The Integral control does not work. It is reduced to a PD
control (Proportional-Derivative).
14.- The Derivative Control does not work. It is reduced to a
PI Control (Proportional-Integral).
15.- The Integral and Derivative controls do not work. They
are reduced to a Proportional Control.
UCP-P. Computer Controlled Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
Always included
in the supply:
Teaching
Technique
used
10.- Process Control
SCADA. EDIBON Computer Control System
2
1 Unit: UCP-P. Process Control Unit for the study of Pressure (Air)
3
Data
Acquisition
Board
5 Cables and Accessories
6 Manuals
Control
Interface Box
4
Software for:
- Computer Control
- Data Acquisition
- Data Management
OPEN CONTROL + MULTICONTROL + REAL TIME CONTROL
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
Items supplied as standard
1.- Calculating the fluid flow in function
of different pressure sensor.
2.- Calibration processes.
3.- Pressure sensor calibration. Study of
the hysteresis curve.
4.- I/P converter calibration.
5.- Identification of the pneumatic valve
type.
6.- Determination of the influence of the
flow rate of the conduction.
7.- Pressure control in conduction using
a PID controller.
8.- Proportional control (P)characteristics.
9.- Characteristics of a proportional
and integral control (P+I).
10.- Characteristics of a proportional
and derivative control (P+D).
11.- Optimization of the variables of a
PID controller.
12.-Optimization of the variables of the
PID controller, flow control.
13- Flow rate control in conduction with
a PID controller.
14-32.- Practices with PLC.
UCP-P. Unit:
Anodized aluminium structure. Diagram in the front panel with similar distribution that the elements in the real unit.
Pressure sensor. Differential pressure sensor. Pneumatically Operated Control Valve. On/off valves. Pressure regulators, one
for controlling the pneumatic operated control valve and the second supplies the necessary flow and/or pressure to the circuit
that is to be adjusted. Storage tank. Pressure manometers. Flow meter. Intel/outlet valve. Diaphragm. Exhaust valve. I/P
Converter.
2 UCP-P/CIB. Control Interface Box :
With process diagram in the front panel. The unit control elements are permanently computer controlled. Simultaneous
visualization in the PC of all parameters involved in the process. Calibration of all sensors involved in the process. Real
time curves representation. All the actuators’ values can be changed at any time from the keyboard. Shield and filtered
signals to avoid external interferences. Real time PID control with flexibility of modifications from the PC keyboard of the
PID parameters, at any moment during the process. Open control allowing modifications, at any time and in a real time,
of parameters involved in the process. 3 safety levels: mechanical in the unit, other electronic in control interface, and
the third one in the control software.
3 DAB. Data Acquisition Board:
PCI Data acquisition National Instruments board to be placed in a computer slot. 16 Analog inputs. Sampling rate up to:
250 KS/s. 2 Analog outputs. 24 Digital Inputs/Outputs.
4 UCP-P/CCSOF. Computer Control+Data Acquisition+Data Management Software:
Flexible, open and multicontrol software. Management, processing, comparison and storage of data. Sampling velocity up
to 250,000 data per second. It allows the registration of the alarms state and the graphic representation in real
time.
5 Cables and Accessories, for normal operation.
6 Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=Unit: 600x500x1000 mm. Weight: 15Kg.
Control Interface: 490x330x175 mm. Weight: 15 Kg.
1
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/units/processcontrol/fundamentals/UCP-P.pdf
Page 64
10.1- Process Control. Fundamentals
CECI. Industrial Controllers Trainer
(continuation)
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for industrial process controllers. This trainer allows students the
study and familiarisation with the function and operation of a industrial
process controller.
Steel box.
Configurable digital controller:
2 inputs, 1 output. Configurable as P, PI or PID controller.
Proportional gain Xp: 0 -999.9%. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Derivative time Tv: 0-1200s. RS232 interface for configuration on
computer (PC).
Digital voltmeter: 0 -20V.
Signal generator with potentiometer. Reference variables generator: 2
voltages selectable. Output voltage: 0-10V.
Controlled system simulator:
Controlled system type: First order lag . Time constant: 20s. Process
variables as analogue signals: 0-10V. System gain: 1...10.
All variables accessible as analog signals at lab jacks .
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for
example:line recorder, plotter, oscilloscope...).
Configuration software CD. Interface cable. Set of lab cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 8 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CECI.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
To study methods and terminology of
process control:
1.-Closed loop control.
2.-Static and dynamic transfer function.
3.-To study the step response.
4.-Reference variable step.
To learn and to familiarise with a process
controller:
5.-Configuration level.
6.-Parameter level.
7.-Operation control levels.
Control parameters:
8.-Setting input channels.
9.-Setting output channels.
10.-To use computer (PC) - based
configuration tools.
11.- Scaling displays.
CRCI. Industrial Controllers Networking
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This trainer enables to take the first steps in process automation using field
buses. This trainer demonstrates the operation of a process control system
based on a simple application.
This trainer allows student the familiarisation with the function and operation
of a industrial process controller.
Steel box.
2 Digital process controllers, with field bus interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp : 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Controller parameter setting via field bus system.
2 Signal generators: 0-10V. Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals: 0-10V. All variables accessible as
analog signals at lab jacks .
Software CD with driver software, OPC server and process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
line recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals:This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)=490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CRCI.pdf
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Function of a digital industrial
controller.
2.- Layout of a field bus system.
To learn and to familiarise with the
operation and structure of a process
control system under Profibus DP:
3.- Controller parameter setting via field
bus system.
4.- Profibus DP field bus system.
5.- OPC (OLE for Process Control)
server function.
6.- Online controller parameters
setting.
7.- Master / slave assignment.
8.- To configure and display alarms.
9.- Reading control variables and
displaying them online.
10.- Scaling displays.
11.- Bus configuration.
CEAB. Trainer for Field Bus Application
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAB.pdf
CEAC. Controller Tuning Trainer
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
Trainer for controller tuning.This unit permits the interaction between
controller and controlled system. The objective is that the closed control
loop, formed by the controller and the controlled system, to show the desired
optimum response.
With a simulation software the setting of controller parameters can be
practised safely. Closed an open loop control, step response, stability,
disturbance and control response are demonstrated.
This trainer no needs real controlled systems, the controlled system is
simulated on a computer (PC) by the simulation program. In this program
the most important types of controlled systems can be selected . We can
recorder and analyse the time response using the software.
The process controller used can be easily configured from the computer
(PC).The controller and the computer (PC) are connected by a data
acquisition card with AD and DA converters.
Steel box.
Configurable digital process controller, with interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp: 0-999.9%.
Integral action time Tn : 0-3600s. Derivative time Tv : 0- 1200s.
Interface for computer (PC). Data acquisition card for computer (PC).
Simulation Software for controlled system models, such as 1st and 2nd order
lags, time-delayed systems etc. Controlled system simulation models with
proportional, integral, 1st order lag, 2nd order lag, time-delayed response,
non-linearity and limitation.
Configuration software for process controller. Recording and evaluation of
time response on computer (PC).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 330x330x145 mm. Weight : 5 Kg.
More information in: www.edibon.com/products/catalogues/en/
units/processcontrol/fundamentals/CEAC.pdf
Page 65
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- Operation and function of a digital
industrial controller.
2.- Function of an analog input/outputs
module.
3.- Function of a digital input/output
module.
4.- Layout of a field bus system.
5.- Familiarisation with the field bus
stations.
6.- Defining the bus technology with the
stations.
7.- Reading out and in, and online
displaying of analog and digital
process variables.
8.- Communication protocols.
9.- To define tags.
10.- Familiarisation with the device
master file “DMF”.
11.- OPC server.
12.- Access to the OPC database from
the process control program.
PRACTICAL POSSIBILITIES
1.- To use commonly applied tuning
rules, such as Ziegler-Nichols.
2.- To study the difference between
open and closed loop control.
3.- Control loop comprising controller
and controlled system.
4.- To determine the system parameters.
5.- Closed-loop control system
response.
6.- Choice of optimum controller
parameters.
7.- Stability, steady state and transient
response.
8.- Study and investigation of control
and disturbance response.
9.- Study of the stability of the closed
control loop.
10.- Learning methods and terminology
involved in process control.
11.- To adapt the process controller to
different controlled systems.
12.- Use and practices with the
simulation software.
Presentation-CLICK HERE
www.edibon.com
10.- Process Control
SPECIFICATIONS SUMMARY
This Trainer is used to teach the initial or first steps in field bus tecnology
based on Profibus DP.
The field bus permits networking terminal devices (controllers, actuators or
sensors) in the plant system (field level) with the control room (control level).
Several devices (slaves) are activated and read by a computer (PC) with a
Profibus DP interface (master).
Different subjects or topics can be covered and studied: bus topology,
system configurator with Device Master File “DMF”, communication
protocols, tags, OPC server, output and input process data, etc.
Steel box.
Digital process controller, with Profibus DP interface:
Configurable as P, PI or PID controller. Proportional gain Xp:0-999.9%.
Derivative time Tv:0-1200s. Integral action time Tn: 0-3600s.
Signal generators: 0-10V. Digital voltmeter: 0-20V.
Digital Profibus DP I module. Digital Profibus DP O module. Four digital
inputs. Four digital outputs.
Analog Profibus DP I module. Analog Profibus DP O module. Four analog
inputs: 0-10V. Two analog outputs: 0-10V.
Profibus DP interface card for computer (PC).
Process variables as analog signals at lab jacks: 0-10V.
Software CD with driver software, system configurator, OPC server and
process control software.
Possibility of connection of external instruments via lab jacks (for example:
chart recorder, oscilloscope, etc).
Set of cables.
Manuals: This unit is supplied with 8 manuals.
Dimensions (approx.)= 490x330x310 mm.
Weight : 12 Kg.